•
GUIDELINES FOR DELINEATION OF

 WELLHEAD PROTECTION AREAS
          OTFICE OF WATER
  OFHCE OF GROUND-WATER PROTECTION
 U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
           JUNE 22, 198?

-------
V-
                                                                      I
                                                                      f

-------
                               ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
        ."*.<''•            •'          .        "•..,''          .;.
      This document was prepared by the U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency,  Office
 of Ground-Water Protection (OGWP) under the overall direction of  Ron Hoffer, Chief
 Hydrogeologist arid Director of the Guidelines  Implementation Staff.  The efforts  of the
 Technical Committee on Hydrogeologic Aspects of  the  SOW A Amendments deserve a
 special note. The communal knowledge and experience of this group, from both technical
 and administrative viewpoints, provided the foundation upon which these guidelines are
 based.  The activities of this group, which worked cooperatively to provide a balanced
 perspective, allowed OGWP to meet its statutory directives in a timely and sound manner.
 Special appreciation from OGWP is extended to key members from outside EPA, and in
 particular to:   Keros Cartwright  (Illinois Geological Survey), Charles Kreitler (Texas
 Bureau of Economic  Geology),  Albert Ogden  (formerly with the  Idaho Department of
 Health and  Welfare, now  with  Tennessee Technological  University),  Hugo Thomas
 (Connecticut  Department  of  Environmental  Protection),  and 3ohn Vecchioli (U.S.
 Geological Survey).

      OGWP extends  its thanks  to the technical consultants on this effort, the firm of
 Dames &.  Moore, with Alberto G. Morilla serving as Project Manager.   The input of key
 staff is appreciated, both at  OGWP (including at  Headquarters:   Bill Stelz,  Carey
 Carpenter, Paul Violette, Joyce Edwards, and Delores  Furman; and in the Regions:  Jerri-
 Anne Garl and Doug Heath), and at Dames & Moore (including Roberto L.  Sanchez, John
 Osgood, Robert  McDonough, Bob Kalinski, Harch Gill, Theresa Thomas,  and Valerie Orr).
 Gordon Everett, consultant  to OGWP,  also  provided  valuable  insight  and overall
 inspiration.

      Last, but certainly not least, go our thanks to Georg Matthess of Kiel University in
 West Germany, and Hubert Van Waegeningh of the National Institute of Public Health and
 Environmental  Hygiene -in  the  Netherlands.   These  two gentlemen have been at  the
forefront  of  the  in-place  wellhead  protection  efforts of  Europe.    Through  their
publications and their very effective participation in our Hydrogeology Workshop, they
have  demonstrated that wellhead protection can be carried but  while  balancing  the
sometimes conflicting demands of good science and implementable policy.


                                                   Marian Mlay
                                                   Of f ice of Ground-Water Protection

-------

-------
                                    FOREWORD
    * -      fc , *
           *. •'                                    .
         '•*"•....      '                ...      -
  *  These guidelines are provided as technical assistance to State and .local governments
in their efforts to protect ground-water resources supplying public wells used for drinking
water.  The document is one in a continuing series of publications on  the  hydrogeologic
aspects of ground-water protection^ prepared in response to the 1986 Amendments to the
Safe Drinking Water Act.  Policies regarding applications by States for financial support
are addressed  in  separate grant  guidance  and application  documents.   Additional
information on the  Wellhead Protection Progratn is available from the Office of Ground-
Water Protection in Washington, D.C., and from the ten EPA Regions.

-------
I       I

-------
                              EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

   V The Amendments to the Safe  Drinking Water Act (SDWA), which were passed in
June 1986, established the  first  nationwide  program to protect ground-water resources
used for public water  supplies from  a wide range of potential threats.  Unlike previous
Federal programs, which have tended to focus on individual contaminant sources, this new
effort approaches the assessment and management of ground-water quality from a more
comprehensive perspective.  The SDWA seeks to accomplish this goal by the establishment
of State Wellhead Protection (WHP)  Programs w,hich "protect wellhead areas within their
jurisdiction  from  contaminants  which may  have any adverse  effect on  the health of
persons."
     One of  the  major  elements of WHP is  the determination of zones within which
contaminant source assessment and management will be addressed.  These zones, denoted
as Wellhead Protection  Areas (WHPA's), are defined in the SDWA as "the surface and
subsurface area surrounding a water well or wellfield, supplying a public  water system,
through  which contaminants are  reasonably likely to move toward  and reach  such water
well or wellfield."  Hence, the law establishes the  concept of protecting some of the
recharge areas to these points of public drinking water withdrawal. The States are given
flexibility in determining appropriate operational approaches to WHPA delineation.  The
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), in addition, is required by the SDWA to release
technical guidance  on the  hydrogeologic aspects of this  task.   These Guidelines for
Delineation of Wellhead Protection Areas are provided to meet this need. Apart from this
requirement,  issuance of  this  guidance  does not  affect  or  inhibit  EPA  regulatory
programs.
     WHPA  delineation policy is generally based  upon the analysis of criteria, criteria
thresholds, and  delineation methods.  The  criteria and criteria  thresholds  define the
general  technical basis  of the  WHPA.   The  WHPA delineation  methods are  used  to
translate or  apply these  criteria, to  develop  on-the-ground or  on-the-map  WHPA
boundaries. In preparation  for criteria and method selection, most States will assess the
availability of hydrogeologic data and the institutional capability of the State to perform
such technical assessments.
                                        ES-1

-------
                                         ., :  .        ,      •    .-...:. i   •    , ,     ^   j
   HYDROGEOLOGIC AND CONTAMINANT CONTROLS OVER WHPA DEUNEAT^
        Th«jse delineation guidelines provide a discussion of the basic concepts of ground-
  ,water flow and contaminant transport,. as they apply to the itask of  WHPA delineation.
   Differences among the major aquifer types are emphasized.
        Approximately half the U.S. population is dependent on ground-water sources-wells
  and  springs-for  its domestic  water.   Though springs are occasionally used for water
  supplies, exploitation of ground water normally  requires the drilling  and  installation  of
  wells or well fields. Under natural conditions, ground water  is in equilibrium and flows
  from areas of higher head to areas of lowe'r head.  Ground-water pumping or discharge
  alters the natural equilibrium and causes  the lowering of water levels around the pumping
  well.  This effect, called drawdown, affects an area referred to as the zone of influence
  (ZOI) of the  well.  This  expression  is  generally synonymous  with  the  commonly
  encountered term "cone of depression."  Part of the ZOI is  contained  within the zone  of
  contribution (ZOC), which includes all areas that recharge or contribute water to the well
  or  well field.  The guidance  notes that both  technical  and  nontechnical specialists -
  commonly (though incorrectly) assume that the ZOI is always completely contained within
  the ZOC.  Understanding the differences  between these concepts is essential to fostering
  more precise WHPA delineation.
       The concept of a WHPA can  be  applied to a variety  of aquifer types under both
 confined and unconfined conditions.  Uncpnfined aquifers,  also known as "water-table
 aquifers," are  in  direct hydrogeologic  connection  with  the  surface, and  hence are
 generally more  vulnerable  to contaminants  originating  at or  near the  surface  than
 confined aquifers.   Confined aquifers, sometimes known  as "artesian aquifers," occur
 beneath  less permeable  materials, and  are  under  pressure conditions  greater  than
 atmospheric.  Despite this generally less vulnerable basic condition, confined aquifers are
 susceptible to contamination from a variety of factors-the relative difference  in head
 between the aquifer  and other aquifers, natural or human-induce.^I breaks in confinement
 such as fault zones or abandoned and corroded well  casings,  and the physical  conditions of
 the confining unit itself.   The  guidance  provides technical  information to help States
 evaluate the extent of specific WHPA's needed for wells under confined conditions. More
tailored WHPA techniques for conduit karst,  fractured bedrock, and other "exceptions" to
the basic aquifer types are also noted.
                                        ES-2

-------
     The delineation guidelines assume that WHPA delineation and protection will be
targetted to three general threats. The first is the direct introduction.of contaminants to
the area immediately contiguous to the-well through improper casing, road runoff, spills,
and accidents.  A second basic threat is from  microbial contaminants such as bacteria and
viruses,  the third major threat is the broad, range of chemical contaminants, including
inorganic and  naturally occurring or synthetically-derived organic chemicals.   The
transport characteristics  of these classes of contaminants are reviewed briefly in the
guidance document.
WHPA DELINEATION CRITERIA
      There are several operational goals the States may use to meet the delineation
elements of the statutory goals for WHP. Three of these are:  provide a remedial action
zone to protect wells from unexpected contaminant release; provide an  attenuation zone
to bring the concentrations of specific contaminants to desired levels by the time they
reach the wellhead; and provide a well-field management zone in all or  part of a well or
well  field's existing or potential  recharge area.  Some conceptual standard  is needed,
however, to meet these goals.
      The conceptual standards oh which WHPA delineation may be based are referred to
in this document as criteria.  They may include  distance, drawdown, travel time, flow
system boundaries, and the capacity of the aquifer to assimilate contaminants.  Choice of
the  criteria to  be applied will  likely be  based on  both technical  and  nontechnical
considerations.
      The technical merits of a criterion depend on the degree to which it incorporates
physical processes affecting ground-water flow and contaminant transport. Nontechnical
considerations include  a State's  institutional  capabilities  for  implementing a program,
together with economic and demographic  realities in  the State.   After selection  of
criteria for WHPA delineation, appropriate thresholds  must be chosen.  These are values
that represent the  limits above  or below  which a  criterion will cease to  provide the
desired degree of protection.
      A  distance criterion  defines the WHPA  by a radius  or dimension measured from a
pumping well to encompass the area of concern.  A drawdown criterion defines the WHPA
 as the area around the pumping well in which the water table (in an unconfined aquifer) or
 the potentiometric surface (in a confined aquifer) is lowered by the pumping; this involves
 mapping all or part of the zone of influence. The time of  travel (TOT)  criteria bases the
                                         ES-3

-------
   WHPA boundary on the time required for contaminants to reach the water supply. A flow
   boundaries criterion incorporates the known locations of ground-water divides and  other
   physical^ hydrologic features  that control ground-water movement.  The assimilative
  'capacity criterion is based on the subsurface formation's capacity to dilute or otherwise
   attenuate  contaminant  concentrations  to. acceptable levels before they  reach public
   drinking-water wells.

        Each of  the  criteria has  advantages and disadvantages in meeting these goals
  depending  largely  on  the hydrogeologic settings  within  a  State, as  well  as  the
  administrative   and technical  resources  ..available.    Selecting appropriate  criteria
  thresholds will  be another key decision point, although it will be done in conjunction  with
  establishing the management elements of the WHP.
  WHPA DELINEATION METHODS

       Following selection  of WHPA  delineation criteria, it is necessary to choose the
  specific methods for mapping the selected  criteria. Six methpds have been identified as
  having been used in WHPA delineations,   These are, in  increasing order of cost and
  sophistication:  arbitrary and calculated fixed radii, simplified variable shapes, analytical
  methods, hydrogeologic mapping,  and numerical flow/transport models.  They range from
  simple techniques to highly complex and comprehensive ones.
      The arbitrary fixed radius method involves circumscribing a zone around the water
 supply that is based on a distance criterion threshold. Though simple and inexpensive,  this
 method may tend to over-protect or under-protect. A significant improvement over no
 delineation, the  method is often used  for microbial protection,  or in the early phases of a
 WHP Program for chemical contaminants.
      The calculated fixed radius  method applies an analytical equation to calculate the
 radius of a circular WHPA based  on  a time-of-travel criterion.   Though still relatively
 simple  and inexpensive to apply, this method provides more accuracy, depending on site
 conditions.

     Simplified  variable  shapes   are standard outlines of  WHPA's,  generated  using
analytical models,  and generally based on a combination of flow boundary and time-of-
travel  criteria.    The appropriate  shapes are then chosen to  match  or approximate
conditions encountered at specific wellheads, well fields, and springs.  This is another
inexpensive yet somewhat more accurate technique.                         v
                                        ES-4

-------
     Analytical methods may  be used  to define ground-water  flow boundaries and
contaminahfaransport dynamics through the application of empirically derived equations.
This is perhaps the most commonly used method where greater precision is needed.
     Hydrogeologic mapping can be used to map flow boundaries and to implement other
criteria through use of geological, geomorphic, geophysical, and dye tracing methods. The
method is particularly appropriate in some types of aquifers.
     Numerical models  use mathematical  approximations  of ground-water flow and/or
contaminant transport equations that can take into account a variety of hydrogeologic and
contamination conditions.   These models offer possibly the most accurate delineations,
though at considerable cost.
     Comparisons  of the results of specific methods in "case study" applications can be
used, to evaluate and then  choose WHPA delineation techniques.   In such  comparative
analyses,  the  output  from more expensive, complex methods is generally compared with
the  results from less expensive, simpler techniques to determine the cost and  benefit
tradeoffs in given hydrogeologic settings.  These case analyses will also be useful for
evaluating, on a generic basis, the  spatial extent of different WHPA's based on different
criteria and criteria  thresholds. Such information could be  very useful in the early phases
of a State WHP Program, to begin the assessment of potential contamination threats  to
public water supplies.                                      /
                                          ES-5

-------
•I

-------
                                 CONTENTS
     '    ;'V     .'  .     ,  •    •'"   "             ...      '•-.'_    • •'   :'
FOREWORD                           .
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY	...1...........................      ES-1
CONTENTS ......			.....................i.............          i
1    INTRODUCTION	...^......        1-1
1.1   LEGISLATIVE AUTHORITY............................^..........        l'1
1.2   PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF DOCUMENT .4..........................        1-3
1*3   EPA'S IMPLEMENTATION APPROACH	        1-5
1.4   ORGANIZATION OF DOCUMENT..........		.	...        1-6
2    HYDROGEOLOGIC AND CONTAMINANT CONTROLS
     OVER WHPA DELINEATION  ..........i...........................        2-1
2.1   BASICS OF GROUND-WATER FLOW SYSTEMS	        2-1
   2.1.1   Natural Flow System ..................->....................        2-1.
   2.1.2   Pumping of Ground Water	        2-3
2.2   OTHER AQUIFER CONSIDERATIONS	        2-6
   2.2.1   Confined Aquifers...	        2-6
   2.2.2   Karst and Fractured Bedrock Aquifers	      2-11
2.3   CONTAMINANT PROPERTIES.	      2-13
   2.3.1   Inorganic Chemicals........................................      2-13
   2.3.2   Organic Chemicals	      2-14
   2.3.3   Bacteria and Viruses	      2-15
2.4   DELINEATION ZONE PROPERTIES AND TERMINOLOGY. ............      2-19
3    DELINEATION CRITERIA	        3-1
3.1   CRITERIA DEFINITION AND CHARACTERISTICS ....................        3-1
   3.1.1   Distance...........	        3-2
   3.1.2   Drawdown	*...        3-4
   3.1.3   Time of Travel (TOT)....	        3-4
  ,3.1.4   Flow Boundaries	        3-8
   3.1.5   Assimilative Capacity	*...        3-8
3.2   CRITERIA THRESHOLD EXAMPLES	       3-11
3.3   CRITERIA SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS.	*	       3-17
   3.3.1   Overall Protection Goals.....	       3-17

-------
                                CONTENTS (cont'd)
 *»   3.3.2    Technical Considerations	oft      -_2Q
     3.3.3    Policy Considerations	,,....               \_-5-?
                                      ^                   •*•••*•••«>••     , y**££
  4    WHPA DELINEATION METHODS	       4-1
  4.1   INTRODUCTION TO WHPA DELINEATION METHODS.,,.	       4.]
  4.2   WHPA DELINEATION METHOD ASSESSMENTS	....		
     4.2.1     Arbitrary Fixed Radii	.	
     4.2.2     Calculated Fixed Radii	'I	
     4.2.3    Simplified Variable Shapes	.	
     4.2.4    Analytical Methods..	....	.	
     4.2.5    Hydrogeologic Mapping	...	
    4.2.6    Numerical Flow/Transport Models	.
  4.3  WHPA DELINEATION METHOD COSTS	
  4.4  WHPA COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS	
  4.5  METHOD SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS	      4_37
    4.5.1    Technical Considerations	
    4.5.2    Policy Considerations	9%
 5    EXAMPLE OF CRITERIA AND METHOD SELECTION	       5.1
 5.1   PROBLEM STATEMENT:  THE HYPOTHETICAL STATE	
 5.2   EXAMPLE OF CRITERIA SELECTION .		
    5.2.1    Overall Protection Goals	
    5.2.2    Technical Considerations	
    5.2.3    Policy Considerations	,....-	       5.5
   5.2.4    Summary of Panel's Decision on Criteria Selection.	     -5-7
 5.3  EXAMPLE OF METHOD SELECTION	       5.7

 REFERENCES	__	          R A

APPENDIX A—STATE, COUNTY, AND LOCAL
DELINEATION APPROACHES	
A.I  STATE EXAMPLES	      A_j
                                     11

-------
                              CONTENTS (cont'd)
       ••*.-'•'•.   '         •: ••••:  "'••••   '         .       .  /'   ••'-'•  •'.'  '
   A.1.1  ^State of Florida......................	..................       A-l
   A.1.2    Dade County, Florida.......:;..............................       A-3
   A.1.3    Massachusetts..........	       A-4
   A.1.4    Vermont...	..;..	....:... ...i....       A-6
A.2  EUROPEAN DELINEATION APPROACHES.	       A-7
   A.2il    The Netherlands..........*.	       A-7
   A.2.2    West Germany	       A-9
                          •              •» -   "-       • .                .,*".-
APPENDIX B-COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS	       B-l
Bil  CAPE COD, MASSACHUSETTS...........	*...	.....-•	•       • .B-4
   B.1.1    Hydrogeology of Study Area	        B-4
   B.1.2    Method Application	
   B.1.3    Data Requirements....................	•••	
   B.I.*    Comparison of Resulting WHPA's.	        B-5
B.2  SOUTHERN FLORIDA.....	•••.	•	••       B-13
   B.2.1    Hydrogeology of Study Area	       B-l3
   B.2.2    Method Application	       B-13
   B.2.3    Data Requirements.	       B-13
   B.2.4    Comparison of Resulting WHPA's.	.......>.........       B-14
B.3  CENTRAL COLORADO.	......'      B-18
   B.3.1    Hydrogeology of Study Area......................	•••       B-18
   B.3.2    Method Application ..............*.............. •..........       B-19
   B.3.3    Data Requirements	      B-19
   B.3.4    Comparison of Resulting WHPA's.....	      B-19.
B.4  SOUTHWESTERN CONNECTICUT	      B-24
   B.*.l    Hydrogeology of Study Area....... P -.:.	'•••••
   B.4.2   Method Application ........................................
   B.4.3   Data Requirements..........	••	•	
   B.*.«   Comparison of Resulting WHPA's.....*.	      B-25
 B.5  SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
 APPENDIX C-GLOSSARY.................		        C-l
 APPENDIX D—MODEL ASSESSMENT FOR DELINEATING WELLHEAD
 PROTECTION AREAS................	«	        D"1
                                       ill

-------
                                     FIGURES
Figure No.
                                                                               page
 1-1
 2-1

 2-2

 2-3
 2-4
 2-5

 2-6

 2-7

 2-8

 2-9

 2-10

 3-1

 3-2.

 3-3
3-4
3-5
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
           General approach to State WHPA delineation ............ ..... . . "
           Ground-water flow system (stream valley) under
           natural conditions ..... ..... , ..... ....................... ....        2-2
           Ground-water flow system (stream valley) affected
           by a pumping well ......* ................... ^ . . ,.. ........... „.        2-4
           Confined aquifer with upward leakage ..... . ..... ..... ....... „.        2-7
           Confined aquifer with downward 'leakage ... ...... , ............ ..        2-8
           Elimination constant and 99.9% elimination of some
           relevant bacteria and viruses in ground water ..... , ............ „ .       2-18
           Terminology for wellhead protection area
           delineation (hypothetical pumping well
           in porous media) ................. ............. .......... .....       2-20
           Terminology for wellhead protection area delineation
           (hypothetical contaminant transport in porous media) .......... . .       2-21
           Terminology for wellhead protection area delineation
           (hypothetical ground-water basin in mature karst) . „ . . . .. . ..... . .       2-23
          Terminology for wellhead protection area delineation
          (hypothetical ground-water basin in fractured rock) ,, . . ......... . .       2-24
          Terminology for wellhead protection area delineation
          (hypothetical confined aquifer in porous media)  ..... ........... . .       2-25
          Relationship between WHPA delineation criteria
          and physical processes .............. ... ......... ,. ...... . .....        3-3
          Aquifer with flat water table and high rainfall
          conditions, where boundaries of ZOI and ZOC
          approximately coincide (conceptual) .............. .............        3-5
          Flow velocity ranges ................... .....................        3-7
          Flow boundaries criteria (conceptual) ........ ..... .............        3-9
          Assimilative capacity criteria (conceptual) .. ...... . . ...........       3-10
          Consideration factors that may affect process of
          criteria selection ....... ...... ...... .......... ... . . . . . .......       3-18
          Interrelationships of WHPA methods ......... . ................ .        4-3
          WHPA delineation using the arbitrary fixed radius method ........        4-5
          WHPA delineation using the calculated fixed radius method .......        4-7
          WHPA delineation using FDER volumetric flow equation
          for well in Florida. ........ ..................................        4-9
                                        IV

-------
                                 FIGURES (cont'd)
 ,-'''•'• T, " -               " f"         •     '           '    '               '       '
  .  .   ;   v        .        •"..'..      ....  .;    .         .
4-J       WHPA delineation using simplified variable shapes method.	       4-11

4-6       Examples of standardized forms of WHPA deUneation
          using simplified variable shapes..*	...........I..       4-13
4-7       WHPA delineation using the uniform flow analytical model .......       4-15

4-8       WHPA delineation using arbitrary fixed radiii
          analytical model, and hydrogeologic mapping
          (example from Massachusetts)	•	
4-9       WHPA delineation using analytical models, step 1:
          Determination of downgradient null point using                                        «
          pumping test data (example from Cape Cod,                                           '
          Massachusetts).....	.....;..	•-••••       4-1&
          • -                  I'".-"            •             '          . •
4-10      WHPA delineation using analytical models, step 2:
          Identify upgradient null point based on Strahler
          prism model (example from Cape Cod, Massachusetts) ..... i.....       4-20

4-11      WHPA deUneation using analytical models, step 3:                                  ,
          WHPA delineation using upgradient and downgradient
          null points (example from Cape Cod, Massachusetts).............       4-21            I

4-12      WHPA delineation using hydrogeologic mapping
          (use of geologic contacts)	       4-22

4-13      WHPA delineation using hydrogeologic mapping
          (use of ground-water divides)	, i...       4-23
4-14       WHPA delineation using hydrogeologic mapping
          (example from Vermont)	••••	       4-25
4-15       WHPA delineation using hydrogeologic mapping:  dye                                  I
           tracing (example from Kentucky)...................•••••	       4-26
4-16       Simulation procedure used  in WHPA delineation
           with numerical modeling	       4-31
4-17       Numerical modeling application to Biscayne
           aquifer well field	       4-33

4-18       WHPA comparative analysis—What is accuracy?		       4-36

5-1        Procedure for WHPA delineation	        5-2            |

5-2        Consideration factors that may affect process of                       - ,
           criteria selection	       5-12

 A-l •      European protection areas.	•	        A-8
B-l        Data requirements for WHPA comparative analysis ..............       B-3

 B-2       WHPA comparative analysis, example for well #1,                       n,
           Cape Cod, MA, 10-Year TOT	«	       B"7    •

 B-3       WHPA cpmparative analysis, example for well Y/l,
           Cape Cod, MA, 25-year TOT	       B-8

-------
                      FIGURES (cont'd)
WHPA comparative analysis, example for well #1,

B-5

B-6

B-7

B-8

B-9

B-10

B-ll

B-12

B-13

B-14

B-15

B-16
t-ape v-oa, M/\, ;>u-year TOT: * 	 „....„
WHPA comparative analysis, example for well //2,
Cape Cod, MA, 10-year TOT. . . '. 	 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example for well #2,
Cape Cod, MA, 25-year TOT 	 	 	 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example for well #2,
Cape Cod, MA, 50-year TOT 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example from Southern
Florida, 30-day travel time 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example from Southern.
Florida, 210-day travel time 	 	 	 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example from Southern

WHPA comparative analysis, example from Colorado,
1-year TOT 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example from Colorado,

WHPA comparative analysis, example from Colorado,
20-year TOT and buffer zone 	
WHPA comparative analysis, example from Connecticut,
1-year TOT 	
WHPA comparative analysis,' example from Connecticut,

Comparative analysis nomenclature 	 	
B-9

B-10

B-ll

B-12

B-15

B-16

B-17

B-21

. . , B-22

B-23

B-26

B-27
B-30
                           vi

-------
                                      TABLES

Ta1>le No.                                                         .             Page
2-1        Persistence of organic substances in ground
           water and soils	       2-16
3-1        Distance: WHPA criterion threshold values	       3-12
3-2        Drawdown: WHPA criterion threshold values	       3-13
3-3        Time of travel: WHPA criterion threshold values	       3-14
3-4        Physical boundaries: WHPA criterion threshold values	       3-16
3-5        Example relationships between overall protection goals    .
           and criteria for delineating wellhead protection areas	       3-19
3-6        WHPA criteria selection versus technical considerations..........       3-21
3-7        WHPA criteria selection versus policy considerations ......'.	       3-23
4-1        WHPA delineation methods and example applications '.'-.	         4-2
4-2        Geophysical techniques	       4-28
4-3        Costs of delineation associated with various WHPA methods	       4-34
4-4        Relationship between WHPA delineation methods and criteria	       4-38
4-5        WHPA methods selection versus technical considerations	;...       4-39
4-6        WHPA method selection versus policy considerations.	       4-41
5-1        WHPA criteria selection versus technical considerations
           (water table aquifer in porous media for the hypothetical
           State example)	         5-3
5-2        WHPA criteria selection versus policy considerations	         5-6
5-3        WHPA methods selection versus technical considerations
           (water table aquifer in porous media for the hypothetical
           State example)	• •	•	• •         5-8
5-4        WHPA method selection versus policy considerations
           (water table aquifer in porous media for the
           hypothetical State example)	 *'............         5-9
A-l        State WHPA delineation methodologies and criteria	         A-2
B-l        Hydrogeologic parameters used in comparative analyses	         B-6
B-2        Summary of results of comparative analysis examples	       B-29
                                         vii

-------
J Jill'"  !i"i    V  'T	  '•
                                                                                                                                        ;  "11, !,,'•:,  ii,i;,:v!'',J!lii!!':'il
                                                                                                                                                          I

-------
          GUIDELINES FOR WELLHEAD PROTECTION AREA DELINEATION
  ,   .      y      _  '..   -          ,       ',  '   ,       ••:,."'_    •'      .   -'
                                   CHAPTER 1                     -
                                 INTRODUCTION

     Nearly  half the population in the  United States uses wells or springs to obtain
drinking water  (U.S. Geological Survey, 198*).  Improper management of contamination
sources resulting from human activities of ten .causes degradation of these supplies.  One
solution to this problem is to prevent contaminated ground water from reaching wells and
springs by establishing areas of protection around them.
     A new provision in the 1986 Amendments to the Safe Drinking Water Act (SOWA) is
the Wellhead Protection  (WHP) Program. This program  is designed  to assist States in
protecting areas surrounding wells within their jurisdiction against contaminants that may
have adverse effects  on human health (SOWA, Section 1428(a)).   The Amendments
mandated that, among other provisions, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
Administrator issue technical guidance  that States  may use in determining the extent of
such areas of protection (Section 1428(e)).  This document has  been  prepared to furnish
such guidance.  Another document, Guidance  for Applicants for State  WHP Program
Assistance Funds,  is also available to aid States and Territories in applying for program
support.
1.1  LEGISLATIVE AUTHORITY
     The 1986 Amendments to the SOW A authorized two new provisions for ground-water
protection.   These  were the  WHP  Program and  the  Sole Source  Aquifer  (SSA)
Demonstration Program.  Both are designed to support the development of State and local
efforts to protect  ground-water  resources.   The statutory  language  creating  these
programs  is in Section  1427 (SSA Demonstration Program) and Section  1428 (State
Programs to Establish Wellhead Protection Areas).   The intent of  Section 1428  is to
establish a State program that adequately protects the wellhead areas of all public water
systems from contaminants that may have adverse human health  effects.
                                            '         ,          ,      •         i  ' ' \ •
     The  SOW A  incorporates the  fundamental definition of a WHP A in Subsection
 1428(e):
                                         1-1

-------
           SfS£?°N .°F,,KWEi'LHEAD PROTECTION  AREA-As  used  in  this
           ion, the term 'wellhead protection area' means th« surface and subsurface
       Jrea surrounding a water well or wellfield, supplying a public water system,
       through which contaminants are reasonably likely to  move toward and reach
       such water well or wellfield.  The  extent of a wellhead protection area,
       within a State, necessary to provide protection from contaminants which may
       l!?Vf ^yj^61'86 «««« on the health of persons is to be determined by the
       State In the program submitted under subsection (a).  Not later than 1 year
       after tte enactment of the Safe Drinking Water Act Amendments of 1986,
       the Administrator shall issue technical guidance which  States may use in
       making such determinations.  Such guidance may reflect  such factors as the
       radius of influence around a well or wellfield, the depth of drawdown of the
       water table by such well or wellfield at any given point,  the time or rate of
       travel of various contaminants in various hydrologic  conditions, distance from            ?
       the  well  or  wellfield,  or  other   factors  affecting   the  likelihood  of            :
       contaminants reaching the well or wellfield, taking  into account available
       engineering pump tests or comparable data, field reconnaissance, topographic
       Information, and the geology of the formation in which the well or weilf ieid
       is located. _                    .           	    	•|1.  	   ,	 •	

       The statute furthermore  defines  a  WHP  Program  as one that incorporates  the
 following elements:                                                                        .

       •     Duties of  State  and  local  agencies and  public water supply systems in
            implementing the program

      •     Determination of WHPA's for  each public well or well field

      •    Identification of all potential anthropogenic sources within the protection area

      •    A  program  that  contains,  as  appropriate: technical assistance, financial       [

           assistance,  implementation of control measures,  education,  training,  and

           demonstration projects to protect wellhead areas from contaminants

      •    Contingency plans for alternative water supplies In cases of contamination

      •    Siting considerations for all new wells
                                                                ' ,     |       '   ] ;
      •    Public participation.                                                             j

      This program must be submitted to the Administrator of EPA within 3 years after

enactment.   States are expected  to make  every reasonable effort to implement  this

program within 2 years after it has been submitted to the Administrator. The only impact

on a State for failing to participate in the WHP Program, however,  is the loss of grant

funds. EPA is not authorized to establish a WHP Program  in a State that does not choose       *
to participate.    ,                                                                         I
                                     1-2

-------
  JU2   PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF DOCUMENT
            \-.' '             '              •          •'••-'..•    ••'.''••.,
       Instituting WHP in the United States will present two major challenges. First will.
  be* to resolve successfully  the technical problems of delineating  meaningful protection
\  areas to prevent ground-water  contamination.  The second will be to resolve the vast
 .complex of  management  problems that will accompany  attempts tp  implement  the
  WHPA's.   States will face  major institutional hurdles,  for example,  in  controlling
  industrial,  commercial, and agricultural  activity and land usage  within the delineated
  WHPA's.  The scope of this document is to provide general  guidance in solving the initial
  problems of actually delineating the protection areas.  The document does not prescribe
  specifio mechanisms or approaches that must be strictly followed.  Instead, the document
  describes a variety of technical approaches, from the simple  to the sophisticated, that
  may be used singly or in combinations.,  The  issuance of this  guidance, in and of itself,
  furthermore does not affect or Inhibit Agency regulatory programs.
       Ground-water protection  is primarily  a  State  responsibility.  Accordingly,  EPA
  intends to ensure that States and localities have flexibility  in developing their programs,
  while ensuring that the goals  and objectives of the law are  met^ EPA expects that there
  will be several stages in a State program for WHPA delineation, shown in general terms in
 Figure  1-1.  Initially, the States will probably establish technical committees or work
 groups  to  review relevant  technical materials (including this delineation guidelines
 document)  and conditions within the State.  After analysis by program personnel, often
  including "test case" applications, "criteria" and "methods" will be adopted, and the actual
  '                  •    .                         *                 •      '
 delineation and mapping of the areas will commence.
       Determination of State WHPA criteria and appropriate WHPA methods (Stages 3 and
 4 in Figure 1-1) are the two major topics covered in this  guidance document.  Criteria
 refer to the primary delineation factors mentioned in the statute (Subsection  1428(e))
 (e.g., "radius of influence, depth of drawdown, time or rate  of travel").  The term criteria
 is used here because these factors can be used as conceptual standards on which to base
 WHPA delineations. The methods are the techniques that can be used to map the WHPA's.
 These methods range from simple "cookie-cutter" approaches  to complex computer
                                                       'i            .      .      ^
 models.
       Only  a few States have been active in  wellhead protection. However, numerous
 European  nations have been involved  in  such  programs   (Van Waegeningn,  1985).
 Information based on their experiences has been incorporated into this document.
                                          1-3

-------
                       Figure  1-1
V  General Approach to State WHPA Delineation
        STAGE
          •MM



          1
WORKING GROUPS
 OR COMMITTEES
  ESTABLISHED
                           I
                    TECHNICAL STUDIES
                          AND
                      INSTITUTIONAL
                        ANALYSIS
                           I
                       DETERMINE
                       STATE WHPA
                        CRITERIA
                           1
                       DETERMINE
                      APPROPRIATE
                      WHPA METHODS
                          1
                  DELINEATE BOUNDARIES
                   OF PROTECTION AREA
                      FOR SPECIFIC
                    WELLS/WELL FIELDS
                          1
                        CONDUCT
                       ADDITIONAL
                        STUDIES
                          1
                         REFINE
                      DELINEATION
                     OF BOUNDARIES
                     AS APPROPRIATE

-------
      EPA expects that delineation of WHPA's will be implemented so as to protect wells
 from three general categories of threats—the direct introduction of contaminants through
 and around  the well casing, microbial contaminants, and chemical contaminants.  The
 immediate vicinity of  the  well or  well  field, is  a primary area  to be protected from
 accidental spills,  road  runoff, and similar incidents.  The management of this area may
 include standards for well casing, grouting, housing, surface grading,  buffer zones, and
 well  abandonment procedures.  Microbial  contamination,  especially  from bacteria and
 viruses,, is of significant  concern, since  micro-organisms  may persist  in drinking water
 even after treatment and delivery to consumers.
      An important element of the amended SDWA, however, is to provide  protection
 from the broader range of threats to ground-water quality posed by a variety of chemical
 contaminants.  While a few hundred feet of buffer zoning is usually adequate  to address
 microbial threats, many  toxic chemicals persist  for long time periods and may  travel
 great distances in the subsurface  environment.  This constitutes the major technical and
 administrative challenge of the WHP programs. Addressing these threats, particularly the
 third one, should greatly reduce the incidence of well contamination in the United  States.
 1.3   EPA»S IMPLEMENTATION APPROACH
      The  SDWA  provisions  represent a  significant   change  in  the  roles  and
 interrelationships  of Federal, State, and  local governments in ground-water protection.
 For -the first time there is statutory basis  at the Federal level for protecting ground-water
 resources,  rather  than  efforts  aimed  at  controlling  specific   contaminants  or
 contamination sources.  The programs will foster  new approaches to resource assessment
and protection, and support, the State's overall ground-water protection  activities.  EPA's
goals in implementing the WHP Program are tos
     •     Meet the goals of the statute                  _   -
     •     Recognize   the   diversity  of   hydrogeologic  settings  and  sources  of
           contamination
     •     Maximize  State  creativity   and  flexibility  in  program  design  and
           implementation
     •     Be sensitive  to concerns regarding Federal involvement in the related areas of
           land use and  water allocation
                                        1-5

-------
                  States in achieving comprehensive ground-water protection through
         ^coordination with State ground-water protection plans and strategies, thus
           ensuring safe public water supplies.
      The Agency's approach during development of these and related guidances has been
to encourage the active participation of those who will implement WHP Programs, and of
those who will be affected.  This  has been accomplished  by the formation of technical
committees,  comprising   State   representatives,   academic   specialists,  and   EPA
Headquarters and regional staff.
      A technical committee on the hydrogeologic aspects of WHP met four times from
September 1986 through April 1987. It reviewed proposed criteria and methods for WHPA
delineation and made numerous recommendations that were used in subsequent revisions
of the draft guidelines. In addition, a 2-day workshop, attended by more than 50 leading
technical and policy specialists and State and local officials, was held in January 1987 in
Bethesda, Maryland.  Detailed presentations of the proposed criteria and methods were
followed by group discussions of specific topics in which the participation of all attendees
was encouraged. Most of the recommendations and issues raised by the discussion groups
were incorporated in subsequent drafts of this guidance document.
     EPA established two other technical committees  on WHP—one on the grants and
financial aspects of the program and the second on the management and control aspects.
As a result of their efforts, a series of documents will be available to help the States in
developing and  implementing WHP, as well as in applying for financial assistance from
EPA.  Technical specialists involved with the hydrogeologic asipects of WHP delineation
must consult the relevant  technical section of the "grant guidance'1 package for insights
into EPA's  approach for  determining program "adequacy" under the SDWA.    These
                           • • .  •        ,       :,    ' .-,p f'l •.',, ;;j!'.»u	' i .,•..' ".'  •:• •,••.••.",.••• <: •.'•:•, I   ^•i,-'f!';^ ";:r--;!!"
requirements are outlined  in Sections IV and V of the Guidance for Applicants for State
WHP Program Assistance Funds, a  document available from the Office of Ground-Water          m
Protection in EPA Headquarters and the Regions.
1.4   ORGANIZATION OF DOCUMENT
     The main body of  this guidance  document  provides a  concise  review of WHPA
delineation issues.  Supporting appendices contain background  technical information and
examine relevant case studies.
                                                                                             i
                                         1-6

-------
      Chapter 2  of this guidance  provides  basic  information on  hydrogeologic and
contaminanHcontrols aver ground-water flow and contaminant transport, as these relate
to''WHPA delineation.   Chapter 3  presents  criteria that  can be  used to establish
conceptually the extent of a WHPAj  it also provides guidance in the process of selecting
a criterion.   Chapter 4 identifies the methods available  for delineating WHPA's and
discusses advantages and disadvantages of each method.  Chapter 5 provides a general
approach to  the  WHPA  delineation process and  examples of criteria and method
selections.
      Appendix A provides background information on several  WHP efforts in the United
States and Europe.  Appendix B depicts several case studies where the specific criteria
and methods are applied, and the resulting WHPA delineations shown. A glossary defines
both  common hydrogeologic terms and definitions  specific  to  the subject  of WHPA
delineation.
                                        1-7

-------
V '
                                                               I

-------
                                                        I
                                    CHAPTER 2
    HYDROGEOLOGIC AND CONTAMINANT CONTROLS OVER WHPA DELINEATION
    «*•                  •   "    '          .'. .                         • .       ..-.-
      This chapter  provides • general information  on basic  hydrogeologic  principles
 governing ground-water flow under natural and pumping conditions, as well as information
 on contaminant transport and its relevance to the delineation of wellhead protection areas
 (WHPA's), For the sake of simplicity, the early discussion in this chapter focuses on flow
 through porous media under unconfined conditions.
      For more elaborate  discussion of ground-water flow and contaminant  transport,
 readers may refer to textbooks by Bear (1979), Bouwer (1978), DeWiest (1965), Driscoll
 (1986), Fetter  (1980), Freeze and Cherry (1979), and Todd (1980).  Other references by
 Fried (1975), Matthess, et al.(1981), and  Yates, et al. (1984)  focus on  contaminant
 transport.
 2.1   BASICS OF GROUND-WATER FLOW SYSTEMS
 2.1.1  Natural Flow System                                                       ;
      Under natural conditions, an aquifer is in a state of dynamic equilibrium.  That is,
 the total recharge to the aquifer is equal to the total discharge, with no change over, time
 in the volume of water stored in  the aquifer (Fetter, 1980).  The motion of ground water
 through an aquifer is controlled by  differences in energy levels.  Ground water moves
 from areas of higher energy to areas of lower energy in order to reach or maintain a state
 of equilibrium.                                                           '
     In 1738, Bernoulli developed a fundamental equation that expresses the underlying
concept governing ground-water  flow,  He  proved that the "total head"  (h)  of a unit
volume of fluid at a location is  equivalent  to the sum of the "pressure head" and the
"elevation head." This concept introduced the idea that if the total heads at two points in
an aquifer differ, ground-water flow will occur from the high-head point to the low-head
point. For example, as illustrated in Figure 2-1 for a stream valley system, ground-water
flow would occur from the  ground-water divide (high head) to the stream (low head). The
"equipotential lines" shown in the figure represent  lines  along which  the total head is
constant.  The  "flow  lines" represent the paths that ground water would follow under a
state  of equilibrium.  The velocity at which ground water would move through a porous
 media aquifer can be determined by the following relationship
                                                        •
                                                        •
2-1

-------
                                                      : If11:,""' Wl	,' 'J:L!
        V-
                 Figure  2-1
  Ground-water .Flow System (Stream
    Valley) Under Natural Conditions
                                                  Recharge
                                              ^Ground-water
                                                Divide
                        ^^=s^^^ss:=^^	—tl^^      I
                       >^,VuwpTOibi«wW.^
 fa) VERTICAL
                               Stream
                                                                 Ground-
                                                                  water
                                                                  Divide**
        100
90   BO    70
60 70  80
HEAD (FT)
90  100     110    120   110
 (bl PLAN VtEW~"FLOW NET'

 LEGEND:
 ——• —  Ground-Water Divide
 ———  Equipotential Lines
      **  Flow Lines
   Z    Water Table

SOURCE:  Modifttd from Oritcoll. 1986
                                                NOT TO SCALE
                                     2-2

-------
  '.   .v  .=  **- '.'.. -  '    •  •'.             '      •'. .  •              .

 where
      v  =  average interstitial velocity                        "
      k  =  hydraulic conductivity                                    •  •••
      n  =  porosity
      i   =  hydraulic gradient = Ah/Al
      Ah =  change in head between two points of concern in the aquifer
      Al =  distance between these points.
2.1.2 Pumping of Ground Water
      The use  of ground  water as a  source of drinking  water normally  requires the
installation and operation of a well or  well field.   Ground-water  pumpage alters the
natural state of equilibrium in an  aquifer.  The withdrawal of water by a well causes a
lowering  (drawdown) of  water levels  in an area around  the well.   From  a  spatial
perspective, this is referred to as the "area of influence" of a well, or  its "zone of
influence" (ZOI).    In cross-section, this  is commonly referred to  as the  "cone of
depression."  Within the ZOI, flow velocities increase toward the well, due to increased
hydraulic gradients.
      Figure 2-2 illustrates  the effects of a pumping well on the ground-water flow
system of the same hypothetical stream valley introduced earlier. The ZOI of the well is
shown in Figure 2-2a.  Figure 2-2b shows  that the equipotential and  flow lines  for the
"natural" (nonpumping) conditions have  been distorted, and are directed toward the well.
This distortion  causes an area of ground-water recharge to the  well.  The pumping does
not affect the flow lines outside of that area.  It should also be noted that the pumping of
the well causes some of the ground water that previously flowed directly to the stream to
reverse  its path  and flow  back  toward  the  well.    The entire  area  recharging or
contributing water  to the  well or well field is defined in this document as the zone of
contribution (ZOC).  Other authors use similar  terminology (e.g.,  Morrissey,  1987), or
refer to this as the "capture zone" (Keely and Tsang, 1983).  The areal extent of the ZOC
can increase with time as the well continues to pump.  These transient zones are referred
to as "time-related capture zones."
                                         2-3

-------
                                  Figure 2-2
             Ground-water Flow System (Stream  Valley)
                       Affected by  a  Pumping  Well
           Recharge
        J     I
                                                            Ground-water
                                                            Divide
       Water Table
                                   ^

     a) CROSS SECTION
                                                                  Ground-water
100      90    80     70    60      70   80  90
                             HEAD (FT)  '
                                                         110 120   110 100
    b) PLAN VIEW
            LEGEND:
              •    Pumping Well
            — — —  Equipotential Lines
            ______  Ground-water Divide
                 »   Flow Line
SOURCE: Modifitd from Driscoll. 1986
A Z
                                               Drawdown at Well
                                               Zone of Contribution to the Well
                                               Water Table

-------
      The two zones described above (ZOC, ZOI) are referred to extensively throughout
 this document because of their significance  to  WHPA  development.  The ZOC  is of

 greater importance because contaminants, introduced within this zone could reach a we'lL
 The contaminants would travel very rapidly toward the well once they enter the portion of

 a ZOC where ground-water levels are significantly lowered by pumping.

      The historic confusion over these two concepts, and perhaps the overemphasis in
.some  ground-water  protection efforts on  the ZOI  or cone  of depression,  is stated
 succinctly by Morrissey (1987):


                  The fallacious idea that contributing area and area of influence
            are identical  persists. ...(This  confusion may have contributed to the
            use of circular areas around wells as buffer zones for ground-water-
            quality protection.) Actually these areas can be the same only in the
            hypothetical circumstances  where the  pre-pumping  water table is
            perfectly flat  and all aquifer properties are uniform within the area of
            influence.   When the pre-pumping water table has a gradient, as it
            does under most natural conditions, the contributing area to a well will
            be distorted to extend to a greater distance on the upgradient side and
            to a lesser distance on the downgradient side.
                 Recharge that enters the aquifer through the area of influence
            of a well will not necessarily travelto the well,  and recharge that
            enters the aquifer outside the area of influence may travel to the well.

      Generally, the most significant process  controlling the movement of contaminants
within the ZOC is called "advection," in which contaminants are carried toward a well by

the bulk motion of the flowing ground water.  Chemical, biological, and physical processes
other than advection may affect the fate of contaminants in ground water. Retardation
and dispersion are two processes that respectively slow and accelerate the movement of a
contaminant toward  a  pumping  well.  Relevant properties of contaminants  that could
affect their movement toward a well or spring are briefly discussed in Section 2.3.

      Finally,  it should be noted that while many surface bodies serve as  boundaries to
flow (the  situation depicted in Figures 2-1 and 2-2), many do not.  Pumping can induce
flow not only from the surface water bodies themselves, but (due to underflow) also from

areas on the opposite side of the surface water body from the  well.  In such  situations,
Contaminants  within  surface waters or from  other aquifer segments can be induced to

move  toward  the  pumping  well.   Analyses of  the  extent  and occurrence  of this
                                         2-5

-------
 phenomenon, and the impacts on WHPA delineation, will be an important factor in some
 hydrogeologic settings and in some State programs.
      OTHER AQUIFER CONSIDERATIONS
      Aquifers  in  porous, • granular materials are  commonly  divided  into  two  types, .          I
 unconf ined and confined, on  the basis of stratigraphic  setting and  hydraulic pressure
 (head) relationships. Unconfined aquifers have an upper water surface (water table) that
 rises and falls freely in response to the volume of water in storage in the aquifer. The
 water table is  a free surface  open to, and in pressure equilibrium with, the atmosphere.
 The upper water surfaces of such aquifers mSy lie a few feet or tens of feet beneath the      ' ".  • '
 surface in humid regions.  In  arid or semi-arid alluvial settings;, the water table may be          I
 several hundred feet below the surface.  The depth to the water table and the nature of
 the unsaturated zone above an unconfined aquifer can be significant in controlling how
 rapidly contaminants are able to reach the aquifer.  Much  is known about unconfined,
 granular aquifers.   These aquifers  have  received the bulk of attention in the scientific
 literature  Other aquifer types such as confined, karst, and fractured rock settings are
 less well understood.  The remainder of this section is therefore directed  to a review of          I
 hydrogeologic factors of these  settings relevant to WHP.
 2.2.1 Confined Aquifers
      Confined  aquifers occur beneath a lower permeability "confining unit" of rock or
 sediment.  Pressure in the aquifer  is greater than atmospheric,  so  that water  will rise
 above the base of the confining unit in a well penetrating that confining horizon (Figures          ^
 2-3 and 2-4).   This situation is also commonly known as "artesian.11  The relative head
 relationships across  the  confining  unit are  key factors in  understanding the  required
 extent of a WHPA, as well as the need for particular management strategies. If  the head
                                                    '  '   'T>  . •• .......            ; i     :.',;"  '..  ' .
 (as expressed by the potentiometric surface) of a confined aquifer  is above that of the
 overlying unconfined aquifer (i.e., the water table), contaminants would likely remain in
 the unconfined aquifer, due to the tendency for upward flow across the confining unit (as          u
 shown in Figure 2-3).  Conversely, should the potentiometric surface in  the  confined
 aquifer be lower than the water table, downward leakage of  water  and contaminants is
possible (Figure 2-4).
                                                                                  i     •        *•
     Apart from these hydraulic head relationships,  the low permeabilities of confining
units overlying confined aquifers can reduce  both the travel  times  to and contaminant          n
concentrations in the aquifer, so that the contaminant may pose  a reduced threat to the          "
                                         2-6
                                                                                  i . •
                                                                '-.   "      •  ' ;  '!  .  •   '      B

-------
  §
  Ul
  Ul
  i
  O
  w
  o
  N
                                   Figure  2-3
               Confined Aquifer with Upward Leakage
Abandoned or Inadequately
Cased or Cemented Wells
                                                      Water Production Well
                                                  Potentiometric


                    Direction of Ground-water Flow
SOURCE: Everett. 1987
                                                                        NOT TO SCALE
                                        2-7

-------
          *••> .*
           V'
                                     Figure  2-4

              Confined Aquifer with Downward Leakage
                     Abandoned or Inadequately
                                                     Water  Production Well
                                                                           Potentiometric

                                                                             Surface
                     Cased or Cemented Well


             Direction of Ground-water Flow
                                                                                               i
SOURCE: Everett. 1987
                                                                         NOT TO SCALE
                                         2-8
I

-------
 aquifer.  Major areas of concern, however, lie with  natural  or  manmade  breaches in
 confinement,*such as incised channels in confining beds or abandoned wells.  Relative head
 relationships in these situations may permit inward flow or leakage of contaminants from
 overlying units.                              .
      As a result of pumping over a period of time, confined aquifers may have their
 hydraulic pressure lowered until the surface of water  adjacent to the well bore  is no
 longer in contact with the base  of the confining unit.  Thus, the water surface is in a
 water table  condition in the cone of depressi9n, although it is still "stratigraphically"
 confined. , .                                                 ,
      Most confined aquifers  are actually  semiconfined, being leaky  to  some  extent.
 Leakage is not in itself evidence of contamination; many confined aquifers derive a
 significant amount of recharge from this source.   Rather, leakage indicates an influent
  . -  /           f.m                    ,
 condition that could introduce contaminants into an aquifer where they are  able to  reach
 the leakage pathway.
      As relative heads  change  to permit  inflow to  the confined aquifer, it  can be
 presumed that  the  relative risk  of contamination to  the aquifer will increase.   The
 potential for  introduction of contamination  is roughly  proportional to the difference in
           \ • • •             .     •      .       •     ,          . .                        .  •
 heads and hydraulic conductivity  of the confining unit.  The  area  most subject to  rapid
 contaminant inflow would thus be in the area of lowest  relative aquifer head; that is, low
 elevation in the aquifer's  potentiometric surface. Analysis of hydraulic head differentials
 and identification of potential pathways should provide a basis for evaluating the risk to
 wells or well fields in confined aquifers.
Shallow, Poorly-Confined Conditions.  Fractures in fine-grained confining sediments  under
near-surface  conditions  can  provide significant  natural  pathways  for   contaminant
 migration. Although fractures have been observed to  penetrate to depths of about 60 feet
in glacial till, they are usually restricted  to  much shallower depths under shallow water
 table conditions (Cartwright, personal communication, 1987).  The permeability resulting
 from  near-surface fracturing is significantly greater than similar  fracturing  at depth.
This is because the  effect of increasing horizontal in-situ stress is to decrease both  the
aperture width and  spacing  frequency of  fractures.   Permeability of unconsolidated
sediments (due  to primary porosity)  is also  greatest near the surface,  decreasing with
 depth.
                                         2-9

-------
       Conditions of increased fracture permeability in fine-grained sediments and higher
 near-surface primary-porosity permeability combine to cause; the zone of greatest risk of
 contaminant transport into a confined or semiconfined aquifer to be near the surface. As
 a result, it can  be considered  that  shallpw, poorly-confined aquifers (100 feet or less
 below the surface) have approximately the same risk of contamination as do unconfined
 aquifers.  If data exist to indicate that such aquifers are as effectively confined from
 surface and shallpw subsurface contaminants  as are deeper confined  aquifers, a less
 stringent approach may be considered.
 Intermediate Confined Conditions.  Between depths of 100 and 300 feet, confinement
 characteristics  are difficult to  predict because  they are;  very dependent on  local
 circumstances.  In this intermediate  zone, some confined aquifers are very leaky. Fluids
 may move downward with ease through poorly consolidated sediments, fracture-prone thin
 siltstones,  carbonate  rocks, and sandstones of  low permeability.   In other settings,
 aquifers of  this depth can be  well confined by fine-grained sediments  or consolidated
 rocks.                                                                                       !
      The intermediate zone lies below depths  where good soils and engineering  data on
 permeability are frequently available (usually only for the range from the  surface to 20
 feet). It is also beyond the depth range for which most laboratory and field test data are
 developed.    Intermediate-depth  confined aquifers  are so subject to  the  specific
 characteristics  of individual sites that generalizations relative to WHPA delineation are
 difficult to support.  Approaches should therefore be developed on a class-by-class (where        I
 regional similarities exist) or well-by-well basis.
 Deep Confined Conditions. Aquifers that are deeper than 300 feet below the surface are
 at the upper (shallow) end of the data sets showing field or laboratory measurements of
 fracture hydraulic conductivity and permeability, or else are sufficiently  close  to such
 data that reasonable extrapolations of properties can be  made.  In addition, the extent of        r
 contaminant attenuation that can occur during vertical transport to the deep units adds to
 the margin  of safety.  Except in such settings as  the  coastal plains and deep  alluvial
 basins, confined porous granular aquifers are frequently consolidated below 300 feet. This
 means that permeabilities  are  greatly  reduced  in comparison with their unconsolidated
analogues.  In such circumstances, the cone of depression can be a significant indicator of
relative  head and potentiometric surface relationships  between a  confined  aquifer, its       £
confining units, and adjacent aquifers.
                                         2-10
                                                                                              B

-------
      Where leakage occurs through adjacent strata, recharge is generally greater in the
 deepest parts.ipf depression cones, decreasing with distance from a pumping center.  The
 recharge  rate increases as the potentiometric surface declines and the vertical head loss
 increases (Walton, 1970).  Neuman  and Witherspooh (1969) and subsequent studies  have
 discussed some  of the complexities of assumptions and their consequences in the analysis
 of leakage. Nonetheless, Walton's generalizations appear valid.
      The volumetric extent of aquifer leakage occurs over a  wide range* Some poorly
 confined aquifers  can produce a high  ratio of water from leakage relative to that  from
 storage.  More  tightly confined aquifers will'have a small ratio of leakage to  storage
 water.    As was  indicated  previously,  leakage only   indicates  the  possibility  of
 contamination, should contaminants enter a leakage path into a confined aquifer. In cases
 where leakage is  from  water stored  in  the confining unit, it may be that no discrete
 leakage path exists across  the, confining unit to an overlying aquifer.
      Deep confined aquifers should be evaluated on  the  basis of various factors.   The
 effectiveness of natural confinement is a major consideration, taking into account natural
 breaches  (such  as  fractured or  eroded  confining   units) and  changes  in  hydraulic
 conductivity from changes in facies of confining horizons. Manmade breaches, such as
 active and abandoned well bores, are quite significant to the possibility of contamination
 threats.  Relative differences in head between the aquifer, confining units, and adjacent
 aquifers are also important.
 2.2.2 Karst and Fractured Bedrock Aquifers    '
      Although there is a broad range in flow velocities among granular, porous aquifers,
 it is apparent that flow conditions in other types of aquifers need to be considered.  Both
karst and fractured bedrock  aquifers can be in either  unconfined or confined settings. In
unconfined and  poorly confined conditions, these aquifers can  have very high flow (and
                                       N               '            .,.-••.
contaminant transport)  rates under  rapid  recharge   conditions  such  as storm  events.
                          "     • •      -            '       -    •      : -  •
Transport times across entire karst or fractured bedrock flow systems may be as short as
hours to weeks, much briefer than  in porous, granular.aquifers.  For this reason, these
susceptible  aquifers should  be evaluated  differently  from the  more common  porous,
granular aquifers.
      Solution enhancement of bedding plant joints and fractures in karst aquifers creates
                  '

 range over  several orders of magnitude between high-flow and normal-flow conditions.
                                        2-11

-------
   Because karst aquifers can include both conduit and diffuse flow paths, different flow
   mechanisms can supply water to well and spring discharges concurrently.   Diffuse flow
 ,, systems can frequently be modeled and evaluated using  the methods for porous, granular
   aquifers, but conduit flow situations are not effectively analyzed in the same  manner.
        Karst aquifers can be divided into diffuse flow, mixed diffuse and conduit flow, and
  conduit flow.  Under conduit flow  conditions,  contaminants  can be transported quite
  rapidly in the system from their point of introduction to the point of delivery, with only
  minimal dilution or dispersion.  Similarly, conduit karst can often undergo rapid flushing
  of contaminants from the system.  As a fesult of different conducting channels within
  conduit  flow systems, contaminants  in .one  set  of channels  may  not interconnect with
  adjacent channels.  Thus, the pattern of water quality during  a contamination event can
  differ considerably from that which would occur in porous, granular aquifers.
       Fractured bedrock aquifers share many characteristics with conduit karst aquifers.
  However, they often cannot match the higher  flow velocities  in karst, because fracture
  apertures have not been enlarged to  the same extent by dissolution. Fractured bedrock
  aquifers generally have relatively little storage capacity in'the pore space of the aquifer
  compared to that in  porous, granular aquifers.   If they are capable of significant water
 supply, this  is usually  the result  of  interconnections with  alluvial aquifers,  saturated
 saprolites, or surface water bodies. They are characterized by rapid and large rises in the
 water  table during recharge/maximum  flow events, and  can  be influenced  by recharge
 from a large  portion of the effective drainage Jbasin.
      As  discussed in Chapters 3 and 1, unconfined and  poorly confined, conduit flow,
 karst,  and bedrock aquifers  that are  characterized  by  high-flow  events will likely  be
 delineated initially by mapping the general physical boundaries of their drainage basins.
 Water table elevations under normal and high-flow conditions  will also provide  relevant
 data. Subsequently, more precise delineation of flow can be conducted to determine those
 portions of the drainage basin that actually contribute to a well or spring.  This effort can
 be based upon use of dye or other tracing techniques.
     Finally, the approach to WHPA delineation  in more effectively confined karst and
fractured bedrock aquifers that are isolated from  both surface water and shallow, rapid-
flow-response aquifers can be the same as that for  other deep, confined aquifers.
                                        2-12

-------
2.3  CONTAMINANT PROPERTIES
     Subjection  142S(a) of the  SDWA  requires States to adopt programs "to protect
Wellhead areas...from contaminants which-may have any adverse affects on the health of
persons/1    Subsection  1428(a)(3)  further  states  that  these  programs  must  as  "a
minimum...identify within each  wellhead protection area all potential anthropogenic
sources of contaminants which may have any adverse effect on the health  of persons."
Based   on  the  current  knowledge  of  contaminant  characteristics,  ground-water
management strategies, and other WHP factors, there is no one operational approach that
will be suitable for meeting this general goal.  Each  State  will likely choose its own
approach  and  rationale.   It is clear, however, that some  knowledge  of contaminant
properties is essential for understanding the adequacy of WHP delineation.
     Many different types of contaminants exist; those of most concern can  generally be
classified as inorganic and organic chemical compounds and elements,  bacteria,  and
viruses.   It is  important to identify what is known about specific contaminant types in
assessing  their  significance in WHP A delineation. The remainder of this chapter reviews
some of the major properties that affect the persistence and mobility of contaminants in
these groups.  These properties  form the basis for understanding WHP A  criteria,  the
subject of Chapter 3.
2.3.1 Inorganic Chemicals
                                             s=-         .        •"              •
     Some  of  the most common and mobile contaminants result  from the release of
inorganic  chemicals into ground water.  Such constituents as nitrate, ammonia, sodium,
and chloride often cause persistent problems due to their high solubility in ground water.
For example, nitrate  contamination from sewage and agricultural practices occurs over
large areas  in many shallow aquifers.  Salt water problems from  highway deicing storage
depots, seawater infiltration, and  brine  upwelling  have  degraded  ground-water  supply
sources that have been stressed due to overpumping.                        -
     The primary mode, of inorganic  contaminant  movement  is  through advection.
Retardation processes occur through denitrif ication, adsorption, bacterial decomposition,
precipitation, and chelation—all of  which are considerably less effective under saturated
conditions.  The  most effective mechanisms  of concentration reduction in ground water
are dispersion and dilution.
     A relative ranking of the  mobility of common inorganic chemical pollutants that are
characteristic of municipal waste leachates shows very significant attentuation of heavy
                                        2-13

-------
  tnetals moving through clay, whereas  there  is only slight retardation of water-soluble
  organictjonstituents exerting a chemical oxygen demand (Griffin and Shimp, 1978; Griffin,
»»et al., 1976).  The  comparative effectiveness of different cJlay minerals and of iron and
  aluminum oxyhydroxides in removing heavy metals has been demonstrated (Griffin and
  Shimp, 1976; Kinninburgh, et al., 1976).  Oxidizing conditions in soils and water lead to
  precipitation of iron, manganese, and aluminum oxyhydroxides, scavenging other metals as
  well.  On the other hand, oxidizing conditions in  water can maintain dissolved nitrate
  concentrations  that can be  readily  reduced under  biological or chemical reduction
  conditions.                  '     '   "  ..  •• '   .;'        ,  .   ^ p  '.''  ^  \\  	     ';'' \
                                           ._.-•  _      : ••. •.' •   i,	 -      .    ••       •.
       Although certain metals may persist for  long periods in iground water, their mobility
 is generally lower  than other  more  "conservative" inorganics, such as nitrates  and
 chlorides.  This is due to the relative  low solubilities of many metals under most ground-
 water conditions and to their tendency to be adsorbed on clay minerals, on hydrous oxides
 of  iron  and  manganese, and  on  organic  matter.   Isomorphous  substitution or
 coprecipitation  with minerals or amorphous  solids can  also  be important (Freeze and
 Cherry, 1979).     '                   i  ' '  ''_  _    '  p  , ' '   "/''•.._!	  ,  .'	".  '  	
      The solubility  of  metals is generally controlled by the most abundant anions in
 natural ground water. These are hydroxyl, bicarbonate, sulfate, chloride,  nitrate, and (in
 reducing environments) sulf ide ions. The mobility of metals depends on the solubilities of
 their  hydroxides, carbonates,  sulfates,  chlorides,  sulfides,  and  organic  complexes
 (Matthess,  et al., 1985).  The movement of metals,  as with other inorganic species, is
 primarily by advection.
2.3.2 Organic Chemicals                                   .
      Although many organic chemicals occur naturally in the subsurface environment, the
effects of certain synthetic organic chemicals are becoming of concern in most State
ground-water protection  efforts.   These chemicals include, among others, solvents,
pesticides, and synthetic hydrocarbons.  Organic chemicals may be removed from ground
water by a variety of means.  Chemical reactions, microbial iactiyity, and cometabolism
either reduce the concentrations of organics or metabolize and destroy the chemicals by
transformation or consumption.  The rate of degradation is influenced by such factors as
the volume of contaminant, its  miscibility and solubility in water, temperature,  pH,
oxygen content, the availability of certain organic  and inorganic materials, and
character of the substrate (Helling, 1971; Iwata, et al., 1973; Griffin, et al., 1979).
2-14
                                          the         I
                                                      I

-------
       Decomposition is especially enhanced by micro-organisms, which are most active in
 soils and inWerobic, shallow, unconfined aquifers. It is uncertain whether this is the result
 of,transformation to secondary organic compounds or complete mineralization.  However,
 decomposition rates are much slower in ground water  than  in the soil.  Consequently,
 organic chemicals can be quite persistent after ground-water contamination has occurred.
      Table  2-1  lists  the  persistence of several organic materials in ground  water and
 soils.    Some pesticides may contaminate ground water due to their higher leaching
 potentials.  It can  be seen  from this table that certain organic  contaminants are very
 persistent, especially  in ground water.   For example, DBCP  has  a half-life of about 10
 weeks in the soil, in contrast with up to 140 years in ground water.
      A growing  concern lies with a phenomenon called "facilitated transport" (Tomson, et
 al., 1987).  Contaminants  that have been considered  relatively immobile,  such as dioxin
 and metals,  have been discovered at great distances from their sources.  It appears that
 organic solvents can  greatly affect  the  mobility  of  these contaminants.    Recent
 information  also  indicates  that  colloids and  macromolecules  appear  to  facilitate
 movement of contaminants, enabling them to  disperse faster than the average ground-
 water flow  rate.  The full  impacts of this phenomenon on the transport  of metals and
 organic chemicals are not  yet known. Implications on selecting WHPA criteria  thresholds
 are discussed in Chapter 3.
2.3.3 Bacteria and Viruses
      The  survival  of pathogenic   micro-organisms  (e.g.,  parasitic and enterotoxiri-
 producing bacteria) in the subsurface environment  has been a key component of public
health concerns  for drinking water  protection  for many decades.   Allochthonic bacteria
(those artificially  introduced) are  usually  eliminated  in the subsurface  environment,
generally faster than  organic chemicals.   In oxygen-rich environments,  bacteria  can
survive  for  fairly  long periods  (greater than 6 months) in  the deeper parts  of  the
unsaturated zone and in ground water.
     The elimination  of pathogens  results from the combined effects of the physical
(including temperature), biological,  and  chemical conditions that exist at  a  site.  The
availability of nutrients and  biological  factors  is most important for the survival of
pathogenic bacteria. Elimination is  faster at high temperatures (37° C), at pH values of
about 7, at  low  oxygen concentrations,  and at high  levels of dissolved organic carbon.
                                        2-15

-------
                                  TABLE 2-1

            Persistence of Organic Substances in Ground Waiter and Soils
      Organic Chemical
                                Estimated Half-Life (years)
                                In Ground Water
 Hydrocarbons

 Benzene
 Toluene
 Xylene
 Ethylbenzene
 03 Benzene
 Napthalene
                                                   In Soils
                                          1
                                          0.3
                                          0.3
                                          0.3
                                          0.6
                                          0.6
 Halogenated Hydrocarbons

 Dichloromethane
 Trichloroethane
 1,1,1 -Trichloroethane
 Dichlorobenzene
                                          10
                                          2
                                          1
                                          1
Pesticides* (solubility in
water)

Chlordane
DDT
Dieldrin
Heptachlor
Toxaphene
DDVP
Methyl demeton S
Thimet
                                         2  to 4
                                         3  to 10
                                         1  to 7
                                         7  to 12
                                         10
                                         0.047  (17  days)
                                         0.071  (26  days)
                                         0.005  (2 days)
Pesticides** (high solubility
in water)

EDB                           5.8
DBCP                         .28.5 to 140
Aldicarb                       0.2 to 12.5
Atrazine                       0.2 to 2
Carbofuran                     0 to 1
                                         0.04-0.35  (2-18 weeks)
                                           0.2  (10 weeks)
                                         0.08-0.15 (4-8 weeks)
                                         0.08-1.1  (4-57 weeks)
                                         0.02-0.7  (1-37 weeks)
Source:
 *Matthess, et aL, 1985
**Cohen, et al., 1984
                                    2-16
                                                                                        -I

-------
Under  these  conditions,  naturally  occurring  bacteria  are   activated,  which  act,
antagonistically towards pathogenic microorganisms in the waste materials.
  *   Elimination is specific for different microbial  species (Figure 2r5).  For example,
Coliform bacteria will reach a 99.9 percent elimination in less than  8 days, while it takes
50 days for E. Coli to attain the same level of elimination.  Under oligotrophic conditions
and at  temperatures below 15° C,  Salmonella typhi can survive more than 100 days,
Salmonella typhimurium approximately 230 days, and Yersinia sp. approximately 200 days
(Matthess and  Pekdeger,  1981).  Several factors control the survival and migration of
viruses  once  they have been introduced into the subsurface environment.  In general, the
climate, clay  content and  moisture-holding capacity, and  virus  type are  the  major
elements  in  determining  virus fate.    Viruses  can  migrate  considerable  distances
underground; virus penetrations to depths as great as 67 meters and  horizontal migrations
as far as 408 meters have been reported (Keswick and Gerba, 1980).
      Considerable emphasis has been placed on examining the persistence of viruses  in .
ground  water.   A recent  study  determined that temperature was  the  only  variable
significantly  correlated with the extended survival of three viruses examined.  In addition,
it was observed that the viruses persisted for longer periods in well  water samples than in
surface  waters  incubated  at  similar  temperatures.   At the   lower  temperatures
characteristic  of ground water  in  most  areas  of  the United States, Poliovirus 1 and
Enchovirus  1 persisted for very long  periods, up  to 28.8 days,  before a  significant
reduction was achieved (Yates, et al.,  1985).  Figure 2-5 indicates that 0.1  percent  of
Poliovirus, Hepatitisvirus, or Enterovirus  can survive  after a 140-day period in  ground
water, which is considerably longer than the survival of E. Coli bacteria. Under favorable
oligotrophic conditions and at  temperatures less than  15° C, Poliovirus can survive for
over 250 days (Matthess and Pekdeger, 1981).                               ,
      From these and  similar findings based on field studies, it has  been recommended in
Europe  that delay times of at least 50 to 60 days, and  where possible as much as  1 year,
should  be   provided   to  protect   wellheads  from   virus  and  pathogenic  bacteria
contamination.   In addition, due to  scale dependency factors  and regardless  of delay
times,  a  minimum   100-meter (325-foot)  distance   is   required  (Matthess,  personal
communication,  1987).  These  conclusions have been derived from an extensive* multi-
year research program (Matthess, et al., 1985).
                                         2-17

-------
                                    Figure  2-5
               Elimination  Constant and  99.9% (Elimination
                       of  Some  Relevant  Bacteria  and
                           Viruses in  Ground  Water
    99.9% Elimination   | |  |     |     |
    in Water After     2751 70   35    23
                       140 t
                           50 Days
                                    16    14    12
                                       Shigella sp.
10   9

10 Days
                                                          Coliform bacteria
                             Salmonella faecal is
                                    E. coli
      More Persistent than E. coli -*-
                               Mean of Evaluated Investigations

                              -j	»- Less Persistent than E. coli
                                                S. typhi
Elimination
                   Viruses (Polio-, Hepatitis-, Entero-)

                     S. paratyphi

                S. typhimurium

                     , - , - , - , - , - , - , - ... — _ - -
     Constant (I/day)  0.0   0.1   0.2   0.3   0.4   0.5   0.6  0.7  0.8   0.9   1.0
SOURCE: Mitthea.etal., 1985
                                       2-18

-------
 2.4  DELINEATION ZONE PROPERTIES AND TERMINOLOGY
      The concepts of natural ground-water flow, the influence of pumping, the rates' of.
 travel, and contaminant transport are introduced in the earlier sections of the chapter.
 At present, these concepts form the elementary principles used in most' WHP programs.
 As will be discussed  in Chapter 3, existing WHP programs are generally aimed at one of
 the following overall protection goals:
      •    Provide a remedial action zone to protect wells from unexpected contaminant
           releases.
      •    Provide an attenuation  zone to brine concentrations of specific rontaminantc
           to desired levels at the time they reach the wellhead.
      •    Provide a well-field management zone in all  or  part of a  well's  present or
           future recharge area.
      Several  approaches have been utilized to accomplish the goals listed above.  The
 approaches  require operational procedures for delineating  WHPA's for  a  variety  of
 settings.  Five  hypothetical situations in different hydrogeologic settings are described
 below to  illustrate the applications of these generalized approaches.  The application of
 each approach is based on specific  criteria (such as time of travel or drawdown) that form
 the basis for several delineation  methods.   The criteria and methods used  in  WHP A
 delineation  are discussed extensively  in the chapters  following.   The purpose  of this
 discussion, however, is to depict the differences in criteria and method application based
 on a range of aquifer  types.
      The first  example is depicted in Figure  2-6.   A pumping well is shown to have
created a cone of depression within an unconfined ground-water flow system. The aquifer
consists of an unconsolidated porous media overlying bedrock.  The ZOI of the  well is the
area overlying the  cone  of depression.  The  ZO'C is the entire flow system that supplies
water to the well, including in this  case a large portion of  the ZOI. The  full extent of the
ZOC  would represent a more accurate appraisal  of the  area  in  which ground water
actually flows to the pumping well.
     The second  illustration  (Figure  2^-7)  depicts (by shading) zones of  hypothetical
transport  of a contaminant in the  same aquifer.  The time for a contaminant to travel
from a point to a well is  identified by contours of equal travel time (isochrones).  The
zones within the isochrones are referred to as "zones of transport" (ZOT's).  Large ZOT's
                                        2-19

-------
                                                                 :	:i	:"•
                                Figure 2-6
                Terminology  for  Wellhead Protection
                    Area Delineation (Hypothetical
                   Pumping  Well  in Porous  Media)
                                                           GROUNDWATER
                                                               DIVIDE
                                                              PREPUMPING
                                                              WATER LEVEL
                            (A)| VERTICAL PROFILE
                              (B) PLAN VIEW
              LEGEND:
                V Water table
                 ' Ground-water Flow Direction
                • Pumping Well
               ZOI Zone of Influence
               ZOC Zone of Contribution
NOT TO SCALE
                                  2-20

-------
                   Figure 2-7
    Terminology for  Wellhead Protection
        Area Delineation (Hypothetical
^Contaminant Transport in Porous Media)
                                                 GROUND-WATER
                                                    DIVIDE,
                    I   PUMPING   I
                    1    WELL
•PREPUMPING
WATER LEVEL
                                    CONE OF
                                  DEPRESSION
                                                    BEDROCK
                                                    SURFACE
                  (A)| VERTICAL PROFILE
                     PUMPING WELL
                      (B) PLAN VIEW
   LEGEND:
₯         Water Table
                     i
         10 Year Zone of Transport
     •—- Direction of Ground-water Flow
     ZOC Zone of Contribution
     ZOI  Zone of Influence
     ZOT Zone of Transport
                                                      NOT TO SCALE
                          2-21

-------
  are shown for areas near the ground-water divide far from the pumping well.  The larger
  the ZOT^(i.e., the larger the TOT threshold), the more protective the WHPA.  Very small
4 ZOTs are shown within the area of influence of the well, where contaminant travel tinies
  are significantly accelerated due to the high hydraulic gradients and flow velocities in this
  area. The 2OT is part of the 2OC, however.
       The third  situation  (Figure 2-8) depicts a ground-water flow system in a mature
  karst setting. The discharge is to a spring used as a public water  supply source. The flow
  is generally  confined to a complex network of solution channel and cavernous conduits
  that is extremely difficult to infer  from the surface. An approach in such a situation
  might be to delineate WHPA's based on the boundaries of the 2OC being inferred as the
 divides or drainage boundaries of the setting.
      The fourth example (Figure 2-9) presents  a pumping well in a fractured bedrock
 aquifer that has  been placed at the intersection of two fractures.  This well location takes
 advantage of the higher permeability and storage provided by  the fracture zone.  Flow to
 the well is controlled  by the  distribution and  degree of interconnection that  exists
 between  fractures  and by  the  variations in  aquifer recharge  due to rainfall.   It is
 extremely difficult to define the actual recharge area of a well in a fracture setting. An
 assumption that  the topographic divides or drainage  boundaries  of the setting represent
 the 2OC may be  the basis for WHPA delineation here.
      The final example (Figure  2-10) illustrates a pumping well  in a confined aquifer in
porous media. In this case, the prepumping potentiometric surface of the confined aquifer
has been lowered below  the water table of the overlying unconfined aquifer.  The
confining layer may provide some protection to the water source.  However, the dominant
vertical direction of potential contaminant flow  in the area  where the potentiometric
surface is lower thai) the unconfined water tabte suggests that this shouldi be examined as
an  area of concern for WHPA delineation.  This would focus the search for abandoned
wells,  fractures,  and other features  that could penetrate the confining layer.  Another
        "   ,^       , •            ' .    • • ;	      , i  ;'",:;  :;. .;: ;:::;;: ,-.:;\x ::; ° ,„-,..,   .,    , i	
approach  might  focus  on a  portion of the  contributing  area,  based  upon .some TOT
threshold within the aquifer.
                                                                                             1
                                        2-22
                                                                                              1

-------
                                  Figure  2-8
      Terminology for  Wellhead  Protection  Area  Delineation
       (Hypothetical Ground-water Basin in  Mature Karst)
                                                                   .WATER SUPPLY
                                                                 /   SPRING
 VERTICAL PROFILE
 PLAN VIEW
     NOTE: The "ZOC" shown was delineated with purpose of
           including all principal areas contributing to the cave
           based on inferred surface and subsurface drainage
           areas.
SOURCE: Modified from Quintan and Ewers. 1985
LEGEND:
   O  Sinkhole
   •  Water Supply Spring
 •*<** Surface Stream
 —— Conduit System
   V  Water Table
                                                                 Limestone
                                                                       NOT TO SCALE
                                       2-23

-------
                              Figure 2-9
            Terminology for Wellhead Protection Area
              Delineation (Hypothetical Ground-water
                       Basin  in  Fractured  Rock)
             Ground
             water
             Divide
                                                                A'
                                                              \
 VERTICAL PROFILE
                                                       Stream
 PLAN VIEW
SOURCE: Modified from Otton. 1981
LEGEND:
  X  Water Table

  ">£ Fractures
_  	Ground-water Divide
                                                                              -I
                                                             NOT TO SCALE
                                  2-24

-------
                                  Figure 2-10
        Terminology for Wellhead  Protection Area Delineation
           (Hypothetical Confined Aquifer in  Porous Media)
                                                      zoi
                 |    Abandoned or Inadequately
                 I    Cased or Cemented Well)
Area of Net Downward Leakage-

    Water Production Well
                                                                        Pre-pumping
                                                                          Level
   NOTE: ZOI is larger than area of downward leakage.
      LEGEND:

        ^*~  Direction of Water Flow
      •^-— Contaminant Flow
        ZOI'  Zone of Influence
        S.   Water Table
SOURCE: Everett, 1987.
                                                                    NOT TO SCALE
                                      2-25

-------

-------
                                     CHAPTERS
                              DELINEATION CRITERIA
 .,**''.         •>                   .                •

      As discussed in the first chapter, the SDWA Amendments refer  to  "factors" that
 may be reflected in this guidance to the States (Section 1428(e)):

       Such guidance may reflect such factors as the radius of influence around a
       well or wellfield, the depth of drawdown of the water table by such well or
       wellfield at any given  point,  the  time or rate of  travel  of  various
       contaminants in various hydrologic conditions, distance from the  well or
       wellfield, or other factors affecting the likelihood of contaminants reaching
       the well or wellfield.

 Many of these factors have been used in Europe and by State and local agencies in the
 United States to protect wellheads against different types of threats, including:
      •    Direct introduction of contaminants into well casings                                    ,
      •    Microbial contamination
      •    Chemical contamination.                                                            *4
      This chapter focuses on a discussion of these factors, here termed "criteria" because
they can be used  as conceptual standards on which to base  the actual delineation  of  a
 WHPA. A distinction is made between the terms "criteria" and "criteria thresholds." In            r
 using a criterion  for WHPA delineation, a value or set of values must be selected to            l
                                                     '                       '               •
represent the limits above or below which a given criterion will  cease to provide the
desired degree of protection. Throughout this document these values are referred to as
"criteria thresholds." Definitions and examples to clarify this distinction are provided in a
later  section.  Later sections also  provide guidance  on the  selection of criteria  and
criteria thresholds.  Chapter ft will describe how criteria and  criteria thresholds can be            i
 mapped using specific techniques or methods.
3.1   CRITERIA DEFINITION AND CHARACTERISTICS
      The term "criteria" is used  in this document to group all  conceptual standards that
form  the technical basis for WHPA delineation. In this chapter, five types of criteria are
identified and described:
      •    Distance
      •    Drawdown
                                         3-1

-------
                                            ,";•!:, I1'
           Time of travel
         H" Flow boundaries
*'     •    Assimilative capacity.
 It is important to note that the SDWA language of protecting WHPA's from '"contaminants
 which may have any adverse effect on the health of persons" may'be met in many ways by
 the State. The selection of  WHP criteria and methods is only one input to this analysis of
 WHP Program "adequacy."
      A State's choice of a criterion will likely be based on a combination of technical and
 nontechnical (e.g., administrative)  considerations.  The "technical merits  of a criterion
 depend on the degree  to which a criterion incorporates the processes affecting ground-
 water flow and contaminant transport.  For example, as shown in Figure 3-i, a criterion
 such as  "drawdown"  considers solely  the physical  process  controlling contaminant
 movement due to ground-water flow (advection). Other technical criteria such  as time of
 travel (TOT) can consider more processes, such as advection, hydrodynamic dispersion,
 and solid-solute interaction.
      In some  instances, nontechnical  considerations (such as  a  State's institutional
 capabilities  to implement a program) would dictate the choice of criteria.  This could
 mandate  use of a simpler  criterion, such as distance, rather than a more  technically
 sophisticated one that might be more suitable if the capability existed to implement it.
 3.1.1 Distance
     * The  distance criterion is the concept of delineating a WHPA  using a  radius or
 dimension measured from a pumping well to a point of concern'.  Any "WHP A criterion
 selected must eventually be mapped.  The distance criterion is the most direct way of
 delineating a WHPA. Since by definition a WHPA is an area., mapping it would  require
 that a selected distance be measured from the well to the point of concern.  The use of a
 distance  criterion by  itself may  present a disadvantage, isince it does not directly
 incorporate the processes of ground-water flow or contaminant transport.  Therefore, the
 resulting WHPA could provide insufficient or ineffective protection.  The latter condition
 might be  a  consequence of trying to  administer  an inappropriate  WHPA with  limited
 resources for contaminant source control.
      Selection of distance as a criterion generally has been based on past experience with
 ground-water pollution control, or  on nontechnical considerations.   Commonly, it is an
 arbitrary policy decision. Distance has frequently been selected as a "first step" in WHPA
3-2
                                                 ,,
                                                1.1!	'";!	11,™

-------
*'•'•-. . ; . ' '•',.' • . • . ' • . "
W)
cS ' .
1

'. ' "5 ;;

to
£
°-
s* * ^i3
C'
o
.0
$
II
£T 0>
0

c?
3Z
> •• ' • .
• ' •
0)
v CRIT
PHYSICALS
PROCESS






9



*














ADVECTION
•


»


•



*











U1
i__
S O
HYDRODYNAI
DISPERSION
(MECHANICAL
DISPERSION AN
MOLECULAR
DIFFUSION)
•









*













ui _
SOLID-SOLUT
INTERACTIOr
(ADSORPTION,
CHEMICAL
REACTIONS)









-








V

• ^





. & • . ..,.. :-..;.'•-'•'
, ' '. . • I - •
3-3

-------
  delineation;  it offers significant advantages  over the absence  of a WHPA.  Further
  refinement of the WHPA's may later  be based  on a more sophisticated  or tailored
  criterion^  Distance .has been used for "generic" delineation of microbial protection zones,
''and for establishing setbacks from pesticide applications.
 3.1.2 Drawdown
       Drawdown refers to using, as the WHPA criterion, the extent to which well pumping
 lowers the water table  of an unconfined  aquifer, or the potentiometric surface  of a
 confined aquifer.   This is the criterion that defines the  commonly used  "cone of
 depression" or "area of influence"  concept.   As  discussed iin Chapter 2, the greatest
 drawdown  occurs at the  well, and decreases with distance, until a point is reached where
 the water level is not affected by the pumpage. This is illustrated conceptually in Figure
 3-2.  As a  result of the drawdown created by a pumping well, the hydraulic gradients and
 ground-water flow velocities toward the well increase.   Drawdown can  accelerate
 contaminant  migration toward a well.  The actual extent of the ZOI can vary enormously,
 from a few tens of feet in highly prolific water-table aquifers ito tens of miles in confined,
 consolidated, regional aquifers.
       An approach to protecting the  wellhead is to delineate the boundaries of  the area of
 pumping influence (ZOI).  This can be accomplished by selecting a small threshold value
 for a drawdown criterion and then determining  the distances from the well(s) to the points
 where the specified criterion is satisfied.  For example, in the  flat water table condition
 shown in Figure 3-2, the ZOI is.likely to coincide with the zone  of contribution  (ZOC).
 Therefore,  protecting the ZOI would achieve a  degree of protection similar to  the  results
 of protecting the entire ZOC.  As noted earlier, however, the more common setting of a
 sloping water table implies a potentially significant  difference between the ZOI and ZOC.
                                 ,|       ,     '   ,     .' .  'i. '!•' ' I,1"  '.'•  . ! • ,'	' -   •  I ,' '  .'• •
 Reliance on the ZOI may therefore lead to inappropriate protection in many settings.
 3.1.3  Tim* of Travel (TOT)
      TOT is  a WHPA delineation criterion based  on the  maximum time for a ground-
 water contaminant to  reach a well.    As shown by Figure 3-1, TOT  conceptually
 incorporates a more comprehensive  evaluation of  the physical processes of contaminant
 transport than  most  of  the other  criteria identified.  Of these  physical  processes,
 advection is the best understood, and hence TOT calculations for WHPA delineation  have
 usually been carried out on this basis. If only advection is considered, the time required
I

-------
                            Figure 3-2
            Aquifer with  Flat  Water  Table  and High
        L . .Rainfall Conditions, Where Boundaries of
         v  ZOI and 2OC  Approximately Coincide
                           (Conceptual)
                   ZOI « ZOC
           RECHARGE
                       PUMPING
                        WELL
RECHARGE
DRAWDOWN
CONTOURS
                 (A) VERTICAL PROFILE
                                                         LAND SURFACE
                                                           PREPUMPING
                                                          WATER LEVEL
                    (B) PLAN VIEW
                                                        , BEDROCK-SURF ACE
                NOTE:
                For the case of small hydraulic
                gradient, the ZOI»ZOC

              LEGEND:
                 • Direction of Ground-water Flow
                                                   -Water Table
                                                             NOT TO SCALE
                                 3-5

-------
  for a contaminant to reach a well would be affected not onlly by the distance to the well
  but also,by ihe increase in hydraulic gradient near the well.
        For most well fields, particularly those where flow velocities are relatively  high,
  advection accounts for most of the movement  of contaminants toward the well(s).  In'
  aquifers where the velocities are high, it is likely that a contaminant would travel quickly
  toward the weMs).  Relatively high threshold values for a TOT criterion may be selected
  in these cases if possible, though some concerns over implenwntability may be raised.
       For  aquifers  with   low  flow  velocities,  other  physical   processes,   such  as
  hydrodynamic dispersion, should be considered. Under such conditions, dispersion becomes
  more important, since it can cause a contaminant to reach a well sooner than would  be
  predicted by the hydraulic TOT equation shown above. Detailed discussions on the effects
  of dispersion on contaminant transport  can be found in Anderson (1984),  Bear (1979), and
  Fried (1975).  In addition, the concept of "facilitated transjwrt" presented  in Chapter 2
  may further reduce  the actual travel time of contaminants  to the well.  Dispersion and
 facilitated transport provide further  scientific evidence that short TOT thresholds (based       I
 on uncontaminated ground-water  flow rates) may  be problematic.
                                   .                 .       ^            .         'i             • ..
      TOT  is  an operational measure  of overall ground-water  flow velocities.  Such
 velocities vary enormously based on hydrogeologic setting.  Selected examples depicting
 this link are shown in Figure 3-3.  It is apparent that, first,  there is great  similarity  in
 hydraulic conductivities in a variety of types of porous granular aquifers, and  second, very
 high   flow  rate  environments-in  fractures,   solution-enlarged  fractures,  boulder        '
 conglomerates, and fractured volcanic rocks and lava tubes-function effectively as either
 open- or closed-channel (pipe) flow. In  the geologic settings for such  high flow velocities,
 which operate under  peak conditions for only short periods of maximum recharge, travel
 times are extremely  rapid.  For the entire flow system, they are in terms of hours to days
 or weeks, rather than the years and multiples thereof characteristic of  laminar flow in
 porous, granular  aquifers.   Whether  confined  or unconfined, the high-flow-velocity        ^
 geologic settings  require  separate  consideration  from  those appropriate to either
 consolidated or unconsolidated porous, granular media.
      As a  result of the focus on only maximum velocities of contaminant transport, the        *
numerous factors operating along the  contaminant's flow path (into as well as within the
aquifer) to  reduce, disperse, or dilute  the maximum concentration  become factors of        I
                                         3-6
                                                                                             I

-------

-------
                                                                                          (Ill III 111
  safety for the vast majority of contaminants. The consequence is that arrival times may
  be more accurately estimated than contaminant concentrations.
 <3.JU* Flow Boundaries
       A WHPA delineation criterion based pn f tow boundaries applies the concept of using
  determined locations  of ground-water divides and/or other physical/hydrologic features
  that control ground-water flow.  Use of ftow boundaries &*^^fa..,fa$ffWl&$M.Jhe
  approach of  protecting the well's ZOC.  This assumes that a contaminant  entering the
      ,         '    !""i '..  .   •     •   .   ;, 	 ,    " v1-!1' i •'	,. •'.« L.   •'.,.«».,;	»,*,-,'. j V! ..';.,.  	';•:•!. .. r i, ,	(JP.	,,	,.
  ZOC would eventually reach the well under the prevailing hydraulic gradient.  Examples
  of surface features that in some hydrogeologic settings act as flow boundaries are ridges,
  rivers, canals, and  lakes.  The limits of an aquifer and a  fixed regional ground-water
 divide are examples of subsurface boundaries,  as illustrated in Figure 3-4.  This criterion
 is also useful for initial delineation of WHPA's for fractured bedrock and  conduit-flow
 karst aquifers.  As noted in  Chapter 2, however, flow beneath  surface  waters  due to
 pumping can occur.   In such circumstances, the flow boundaries criterion  is much less
 relevant.          .               -                     '	,    ,  \'     f.^  ....'...,,., ...
      The flow boundaries criterion is especially useful for small aquifer systems, where
 TOT to  the boundaries may be very brief, or where the ZOI created by well pumping is
 rapidly affected by  proximity to the physical limits of the aquifer.  Moderate to larger
 aquifers, with boundary separations of tens to hundreds of miles, may be less amenable to
 this criterion due to  problems of implementing protection over very large geographic
 areas.   Exceptions should be expected,  however,  such as  where the  well is situated
 relatively close to these boundaries.
 3.1.5 Assimilative Capacity
                       wj'1'1             ,  ,   . , '  ,„,",,   '" '„, '„ |,,!|! I1:,!,;:,,,:,,,',",,; „,,,,:',', , ' „,,.,, „ „', , "" ;, .,
      The  assimilative capacity criterion for  WHPA  delineation applies the concept of
 using the ability of the saturated  and/or unsaturated  zones of a formation to attenuate
 the concentrations of contaminants) to acceptable levels before they reach  a well.
      A  hypothetical  illustration  of how  the assimilative  capacity  of  a subsurface
 formation  could be used as a criterion in WHPA delineation is shown in Figure 3-5.  The
 figure indicates  that  the subsurface formation will  attenuate  concentrations  of
                   'si        • '•  .•" ',     " , ' ,!  i .' '  ', ••" '.i' i , -,"' i',1'1" ,': «."ul1",!;:;.. 'ii'.!.!*?^'1"'''''.]!:!1 • 'U"1'/1!! : "t /if,, if1'1 " 'n"1 !''!,l> ,; ','. ]•,•«? •'^\.
contaminants  generated by continuous sources located at points (1) and (2).  By the time
these contaminants reach the well, a desired standard or "threshold concentration" (Ca)
would be satisfied.
                                         3-8                                                   s
                                                                                  I
                                                         , „• i  /•",",'  ;'.'.. , ,     >-,	
                                                    •  :-.::".,;:.<'-,:, ••  '•-    i              a

-------
          .Vi
          Figure  3-4
Flow  Boundaries  Criteria
         (Conceptual)
(a)
                                                       River Discharging to Ground-water
                                                               Low-permeability rock
(b)
                     NOTE:
                     (a)  The ground-water divide induced by the river is an example
                         of the type of surface feature that may be used as a physical
                         boundary criterion [Figure (a) modified from Driscoll (1986) ].
                     (b)  The boundary between the "single valley system" and "the ,
                         regional system" is an example of the type of subsurface
                         feature that may be used as a physical boundary criterion
                         [Figure (b) modified from Fetter (1980) ].
                     ^  Water Table
                     —v Direction of Ground-water Flow
                                            3-9
                                                                               I
                                                                                NOT TO SCALE

-------
3-10

-------
     There are no known examples of the use of an assimilative capacity  criterion to
delineate a^HPA  for a  wide range of contamination threats.  The  existence and the
kinetics of attenuation processes are closely tied td specific contaminants and soil and
aquifer matrix composition and conditions, they are not easily modeled or quantitatively
determined.  Site-specific data for particular contaminants are needed for  evaluations;
for most contaminants, little specific information on reactions Is available.  As a result,
the attenuation mechanisms are generally considered too complex for selection as WHPA
criteria.   The degree  to which they  retard contaminant transport  rates  or diminish
concentrations  becomes  an  unstated  facto!'  of  safety  in some methods of  WHPA
delineation, however.
      Where contamination threats are limited to one or two types, there have been some
attenuative-capacity analyses.  Examples include evaluations of nitrate loadings from
septic tanks in certain  northeastern U.S. communities, and buffer  zone concepts for
guarding against Aldicarb contamination in Florida.
3.2   CRITERIA THRESHOLD EXAMPLES
      Development  of  a WHP  Program will require that one  or  more  of the WHPA
delineation criteria discussed above be selected. In addition, a threshold value, or a set of
them, must be chosen to implement the actual protection area delineation. Thresholds
may be chosen for all three categories of threats (direct, microbial, and chemical), though
the first two are often combined. A threshold value selected to implement an appropriate
criterion that is overly or insufficiently conservative might not achieve the WHP goals.
      This subsection presents examples of threshold values that have been used by
national, state, regional, and local governing  bodies.  Tables 3-1 through 3-4  present
threshold  values  for distance,   drawdown,  TOT, and   physical boundaries  criteria,
respectively.   The information is presented for illustrative purposes only, though it does
 indicate the range of thresholds that are currently being examined.  In general, protection
 from chemical threats is being reviewed over the following  criteria threshold ranges:
      •     TOT—5 to 50 years (within the aquifer); less than 5 years in high-flow settings
      •     Distance—I,000 feet to more than 2 miles
      •     Drawdown—0.1 to 1.0 foot
      «    Flow Boundaries—Physical and hydrologic
                                         3-11

-------
*  J
."J  fe

i  i
            t
            11
li*
is*
l?i
*
            H

            fl
 g
 Saw
         fll^*^
         i'ltflf
         *sfsl^
                           I
                             •
                             i
              i
         i
         »H
                                          I
                                          .u
                       i
                        ilk
                        !|!11
                        £ i
   1   p
L li. |i38li
r« €2.*? ju'vuar:
us Us iii^lf
I * *5lel*I & 3  1  Ic II  * I•*•*
I Hi III H, I  If 111 Ijlifi

i f il;!iy! li I;  f> lii U!
            I
                  *1l
                5

              !l,
              !lf
              l||
              nijp

              3U
              §1
       ilfll!'
       «8
 i?l
 52s
          .1
jiw
Hill
s-ggfl
* *• o "S t
.-5S.-S?
                     1
                      5
                      »
               II

              3-12
                        .1,
                        Ml
                        -II
                       Us|
                       Usi

                      J51»
                      5STJ
                        sit} i
                         IHJ
                              •Sa
                              Jim
                            = 5!
                                                                1

-------
                          3»

                          li
                  i

                  I-
                  •o
                  "3
                  o
               UJ  «J


                  5
                  •§

                  (0
*.
                                     : *?i
                                     
-------
                                            I'll II	I1""
               £
               2*
               T-
               £ii
               111
    i
    I
                              I
                             ll
                             :r
*?
Ul  *C
^  o
ffl   _.
s  I
   «
   I
   •*-*
   O
   I
o|
I*
•S-Jt
51
                      1   !
                      s  i?
         f •«
         :?i
                         111-*
          f  1-
          f  al
1  "ii-si  i  -fr-s
!  III!it  !l
      III !
«
II
II
C» >V ts;"oTS  >.   -rjj
f!ft iJIffiUil
        r*
,
teri
        |J
        •8*
                 < US.
                                s« if
        « II <8ii £§ II III
                 I*
                 EJ
                  .
                *?!
                 5
                           Is
                           3-1*






ir with velocl.
fyrOWJO
H
•»ci
Ground-water flow
tlesranglng from 1
ft/yr).








i
.

«*\
||
~|
.'J
1
t i
. I i
HI 1
|
|f
£
1
i


K1! ll
§1*1 i
!L nlscayne Aquifer It
part by Hluikn^M
undstone, and sand
permeable wedge-si
Recharged hy local
I

! Information which
literature concerning
rnese viruses have
•vlve In water and soil:
100 days."
iliil
K ^ > g >
3 5 .bit!; g
3iill
>
i
•1
g
—
;L (same as above)
Hade County, F
i
longest period of
which the nisrayne
icharged by normal ra
Sii
EiiSE
S Eȣ
S. e t «i
JIK
to
i
SJ
»
M
                                                           1

-------
«\
111

CD
<
i
To 2
7^
s|
£'
1
J
t;
1
J
' '

<**
.

Is
llr
"ll
I "
= r
!|I
L |
i|l
I1!
•
Rrfc-f Description ol
IfydroecoloKlr Sctthis

I




Rationale


iii


g
rl

' «
A rontlnuously sbiklng hash) In which
sedimentation ol marine and fklvtatlle
sands and clays has taken place.
Flat topography and only locally hilly.
tittle faulting. Mainly uniform,
horizontally layered aqiiKf rs ol un-
consolidated sand and clays.
Ground-water flow Is laminar with veloc
• ties ranging from 10-100 m per year
WHK It/year)
1
I
1 •

|pu
|fj|tf|

^sll&'fc
fill fill
f S.S^ol£5

O '





1
a
I



8
5


1
!M ' •
m
i
3
I
1
|

•n
111
ny cases even
Iclent to guan
ile water supp
9S 9
6 2-
"Brraiise In
will not be <
continuity c

R,


r.



a/\
s




pj.


£
Geoiogk formations hcfcnle the Mashpe
pitted outwash plain deposits, and
" Buzzards Day moraine and outwash depo
The majority ol town is situated over
the Mashpee pitted outwash plain.
Z
5
75
£
i£
I*l'|
^H-
sll||
IpSJ
* £J2!5
c %•££ s
11*35
Iflll
*!iu
l-6H--
fi. c »- c e f*
-alf Ssg
: s ? a s fe
.-iiiis ;

2RS
                               3-15

-------
to
1
': , ,m
: .. J
', . , js


,
i
1 •
• ^ ,

?
i =
£
i
j
! i
I
e
J^r*
•|i

i Wj

T3 w j
> *
1
Cl
£
g *i
*** 6 *•
1 ll
o £r
1 U

&
jj
I I
"m "5
^ J
10
£
Q*
|
f£
If
: • r
H
!
t
»
i
:




	

•> • •



i

1


g
Is



- . ^S
BiBi
i Irflli
If S!«!


<•



i




g
••7






-
^iHn-S^
•


i
i
|


"...ireti of WHPA1 were outlined to en-
, compatt the inferred rerharge none to
earli particular ground-water wtin-e."
Topographical and
Local Ground-Water
Divide
||l!I|j

atftlH
5
3
a

-...•moer »iea«!y itate condltlom thrre
h a rikeel reblloaihlp between the-
vodHiie of water pumped frotn a well and
Hie Innd area comprising the Zone ol
Conlrllnitlon (ZOO."
B £
to
i?i s
:il i

s
1
f

'• i
run i nuance to
Regional Ground-Water
Divide


»

s
J!
?! .
£
J


o
=



Iff i

^i-i |
ff|l I
jB« S* —
i?1!!
•• v~ i *
SkJE S "p s
s 8 •" s. •!
Hit i
a
ii
* 9
c
*
"Tne comp-iti-r modeling Indicate* that
the cone*f -inlluence will not extend
east ol thn SCE Canal..."
fr
5
L 1
!l '
u


















,',









1 ! jiJ« i{
l ii fifjiji
1 liiiiii

                                     3-16


-------
      •   ^Assimilative  Capacity—Single-constituent only;  targeted to drinking water
           s-        ',"-•'-,,.      .      •        •              '    ' •
           standards.
  *                    -                  • .      '       ' •                   "•"
3.3   CRITERIA SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS
      Three major  considerations, shown  schematically  in  Figure 3-6, can affect the
delineation of WHPA's in a State.  The relative importance of each consideration will vary
from State to State. The considerations are:
      •    Overall protection goaKs)
      •    Other technical considerations
      •    Other policy considerations.
      Policy issues  are comprehensively addressed under parallel efforts by EPA. This
subsection emphasizes the technical considerations and the overall protection goals that
affect criteria selection.  However, a brief discussion of the effects of policy issues is
also included. Policy and technical considerations will not always lead to the selection of
the same criterion. For example, policy considerations for a specific geologic setting may
lead to the selection of distance as the criterion, while technical considerations may lead
to selecting  a criterion  such as flow boundaries.   Similarly, technical evaluations of
ground-water  flow  may suggest TOT thresholds  of 50 years or  more, whereas policy
considerations may favor TOT thresholds of 10 to 20  years.
3.3.1 Overall Protection Goals
      As noted previously, three  general goals have  been identified as relevant  to the
process of selecting WHPA delineation criteria:
      •    Reaction Time.   Provide a remedial  action zone  to  protect wells from
           unexpected contaminant releases.
      •    Attenuation of Contaminants.    Attenuate the  concentrations of specific
           contaminants to desired levels at the time they reach the wellhead.
      •    Protect All or Part of  ZOC.  Provide a well-field management zone in all or a
           major portion of a well's existing or potential recharge area.
                       \,                      ,
Relationships  between the criteria and these goals,  along with a  brief assessment of  the
goals, are shown in Table 3-5.
                                        3-17

-------
                Figure  3-6
Consideration Factors That  May Affect
             Criteria  Selection
                       POLICY ISSUES
   REACTION TIME
ATTENUATION

CONTAMINANTS
                        SITE-SPECIFIC
                        CONSIDERATIONS
      PROTECT ALL
      OR PART OF
      ZOC
(Hydrogeologic Setting,
Technical Capabilities,
Sources of Contamination,
Other Technical
Considerations)      ^&
                                                                   f
                   3-18

-------
           -.1 -«l
           52NSZ«
           •BS^IS?! .

           1*1lift

           ifSi£«l*
           ii-sf

           filP
           ||!|]j
                 J)-i
                 SEE

                 *n
                 E?S


                 "Hi
                   a u
                            X £
                             «ga
                       i S.

                      *\\
                      •gg
                      Ir!
                      SS|s

                      *i!&
                      * !L—J?
                      afil
  U
   rt

    s
   £> m


«JI
UJ
   i
              "
          s
            |§j|.

 «3






 1
           !i
      £"§•£ S

      !ii> 2
      "5* SP
p*«|8^
lt£l-e£
^
M


!
           |l$r"':

           ill
           jisiii

                 f-ji

                   ii
                 « 0.0 a
                 n o. t) >
                 0 a eea
            £5»|t;-ig
            |"-§gs^S>|

            5&*Z$£SS
                 till
                 £i£S
•5e;
« *•§ ws s-
  |-c£ o.



 ill!!  liliS
•s^i


III
vR i
I
                  . s £

                  i*tt
 •* (S j

 :£S
                      ml
                      •>  s S
                      a « o.*

                      *!H
                      ifit
                      illi
                                  iJS
                                  ^
                      «* x "5

                      611
    'iiij
     ££•= «e
   ,  nnn
!UU mm
   C ,_
   &
   I
   M
   X

   U)
'V
«J
fll
 6
        "l
        y^
         o k

         lit
         S » »
         III'
         Iril
                     IA  | o|&3

                     4 'I filll
                 *f—  .. _ IB „ K


                 4l ••? 4^11
                 ~ga 1. £§• 22
                 O Ut. IN & «JT5 O
                                  £
                                  1

                                  U.
              nil
                       §1**
                        5« v
                       o£±£
                    U
                   fir*
                   fell
                       ;ti
                                   *|4l
                                   t§£5
                      1|1

                       'HI
                       IBS
                      3-19

-------
                                         ' '                                   '
        Technical Considerations
                            ,                    -              .         ,            i
       This  subsection identifies the  technical  factors that am be used to evaluate and
 »ultimately select the delineation criteria; A matrix of technical evaluation factors versus
  criteria is presented as  Table 3-6.   The matrix cells have  been left blank so thaj an
  appropriate ranking of each criterion may be made by a State or locality in the selection
  process.   It  should be noted  that the relative importance of these evaluation  factors
  depends on the hydrogeologic  setting as well as  the goals of the protection program in
  which they are applied.  The technical factors are described below.,
  Ease of Application. A factor  in evaluating a criterion is how easily a technical user can          f
  apply it.  For valid WHPA delineations, the State must have technical specialists capable
  of  implementing  the delineation criteria chosen.  The more technologically demanding
  criteria require more advanced  and specialized user abilities.

  Ease of Quantification.  The ability to place a numerical value or threshold on a criterion
  has a major influence on its suitability for use in guidelines or regulations.  Some criteria,
  such as distance and TOT, are easily expressed in numerical terms.  Others, most notably          !
 assimilative  capacity,  are  difficult  to  quantify.    Consequently,  the  clarity  of
 communicating or legally defining criterion values can vary widely.
 Variability Under Actual Conditions.  Another consideration is ithe ability of a criterion to
 reflect  changes in hydrologic conditions. These changes  may be due  to  pumping rates,
 recharge  rates,  and flow boundary  effects,  and  will  likely affect  movement  of a          r
 contaminant toward a well. For example, a criterion such as TOT  will allow a user to
 modify  the size of a WHPA to  reflect an anticipated increase in pumping rates.  In such
 case,  the  hydraulic gradients near a well will be increased, and  the distance that a
 contaminant will travel  in a given time (i.e., a specified criterion threshold) will also
 increase.

 Ease of Field Verification.   Often it is quite difficult  to reproduce accurately in the field           B
 values that have been previously calculated.   The ability to confirm criterion threshold
 values through onsite testing or  inspection thus becomes significant in evaluating criteria
 for selection.   For example, in a  porous media aquifer it would be considerably  more
 difficult to verify estimated TOPs than drawdowns.                               "            .. '"
Ability to Reflect Ground-Water Standards. Another consideration for selecting a WHPA      •   '  •.
 delineation criterion is the potential for relating it to an overall water quality standard (in           •
the well or ground water).   For  example, selecting assimilative capacity as a delineation
                                         3-20

-------
 IA
 C
^o


I
 0)
 c
 O

co  5
    4A
^~  0)

•§>
 a>
U)

 O
          IO

          uj  O
^ s fi-» S 5
< < CC O H §
W Ik >.

3Oit
M U. X
          .

         8*°
         U. K
              CO
fe^
         u,   0
         < OL
         UJ <
STANCE
                           c
                           o
                        O uj

                        i£
                                           I
                                         O =
                                         ->9
                                         U. CD
                                            UI
                                          I


                                          _«

                                          X
                                          o


                                          tA

                                          in



                                          U)
                                          c
                                          a
                                          ec

                                          ui
                                                       111

                                                       CD


                                                   I  I
                            3-21

-------
       „!i             "1|"   -•        ,      ,   ' i ,„'" ™ , ' •  '',,,,''"''!,, !",' ,";""'' „ !,'!" "l'1 !'    ,' ,"„„ !, ',', f' ", ,  ' ', " ,"'	:,
  criterion implies that the attenuation characteristics along flow paths in the saturated
  and unsaturated zones are known.  Knowledge of how, where, and when the concentrations
 «of a specific contaminant are reduced would be helpful in determining whether a standard
  can be met.           .                                   ,.  	',   ,,,,  .  ' 	 '

 Suitability for a Given Hydrogeologic Setting.  Hydrogeologic controls over ground water
 vary widely under natural conditions.  The ability to apply a criterion to the hydrogeologic
 setting being considered is, from a technical perspective, an essential evaluation factor.
 Among the major  physical controls that may influence the appropriateness and ease of
 criteria application are the location of aquifer boundaries, extent of confinement, degree
 of consolidation, amount of fracturing, and extent of solution channel development.
 Ability to  Incorporate Physical  Processes.    Selection of a criterion should  include
 consideration of whether the physical processes controlling contaminant transport at the
 specif ic site are incorporated by the criterion.
 3.33 Policy Considerations
       Because  a parallel effort by  EPA is addressing poliqr/management  issues, this
 subsection will describe  only a few  basic  policy considerations  for  illustration.   The
 discussion is not intended to be comprehensive.
      'I     "         ''            	  '   	       ' '      " " '	 {	• •' '   „.',,'  •	 • •  ', • j   ., ,
       To aid in  the  process of selecting a criterion, an evaluation matrix of criteria versus
 policy considerations is presented as Table 3-7.  The  matrix cells have been left blank, so
 that  an appropriate ranking of each criterion may be made by a State or locality  in the
 selection process.  The policy considerations in the  matrix are  described  below.  In
 general, it should be  noted that the primary policy  consideration, which cuts across the
 four separate considerations, is the applicability of the criterion to the overall WHP goal.
Ease  of Understanding. How easily a criterion can be understopd by the general public is
considered to be a  significant measure of its usefulness, and may affect the  decision to
use the criterion in a  WHPA delineation program.   For example, prior to establishing a
delineation  program,   the  policy  of  a   State   may  be   to   conduct   a  public
outreach/information program, for which purposes ease of understanding will be relevant.
Economy of Criteria Development. The economics of developing a criterion and related
threshold values are also significant considerations.  The costs of applying a criterion, and
of developing the technical resources to  support  this  application, may do much to inhibit
or encourage its use.  Generally, criteria that are highly complex, rely on a  detailed data
                                         3-22

-------
   .2

    S
    o>
    X
    u
 o  c
t—  o
   V
             ill O


             5tt<
M
  UJ
   fit .„
   *•• *3  — .
             |§HCO

             «T 0=51
             m

             v>


             Ul
             u.
             Ul

             O
O < ui

£51
S "J O
2tS
             UJ
    «••

    >
    UJ
    g
             u. • °


             tn 5? u
STANCE
DRAWDOW
                                                  CO
                                                  UJ

                                                  E

                                                  S


                                                li
                                                .JO
                                                U. 00
                                                        Ul
                                           §E
                                           IS
                                           8Sc
     CO

     I

     a.

  S  <
^Ts
                                  3-23

-------
base, or are labor intensive to apply will be expensive. This inay deter their selection and
acceptance, even though their technical validity is unquestioned.
Defensibility.  Enforcement and permitting considerations will require that the boundaries
of a WHPA be clearly defined and defensible against potential challenges and  litigation
from the parties affected by the delineation.  Some criteria are more contestable in legal
disputes than others.  Therefore, policymakers may  prefer to use the most technically
defensible criteria  for  those areas  in  a State where the potential for litigation or
challenge to the delineation is likely to occur.
                  „        ,    ii          >*               , „ ,  	 ,   i              	
Usefulness for Implementing Phasing.  Some  States  may prefer to initiate  their WHPA
programs using the simplest and/or most economic criteria. For example, a criterion such
as distance could be selected at the initial phase. The concept of "phasing" is to initiate
the program in this way, moving toward more sophisticated criteria at a later  time.
Relevance to Protection Goal. A final deciding factor in criteria evaluation is the degree
to which specific criteria can meet or support the protection goal selected by the State.
As mentioned in subsection 3.3.1, with examples in Table 3-5, these goals include providing
a remedial action zone, an attenuation zone, and a well-field management zone.
                                                                                             i
                                        3-24

-------
           ^                        CHAPTERS
                          WHP A DELINEATION METHODS

      This chapter describes the techniques or "methods" used to translate the selected
criteria and  criteria thresholds described in the previous chapter to actual, mappable
delineation boundaries. Information has been assembled on the methods used in various
ground-water protection programs in the United States and Western Europe to delineate
WHPA boundaries. From this information, six primary methods were examined.  Each has
inherent strengths and  weaknesses, depending upon  hydrogeologic conditions and the
overall goals and objectives of the WHPA program.  This chapter reviews these methods
and provides examples at different-levels of sophistication. Since WHP is a relatively new
concept, however, new methods  or  modifications of existing methods  will undoubtedly
                                               >;     .-'•_•-
surf ace in the next few years.
*.l   INTRODUCTION TO WHPA DELINEATION METHODS
      The six  primary  methods are listed  below in  order  of  increasing technical
sophistication:
      •    Arbitrary fixed radii                               ,
      •    Calculated fixed radii
      •    Simplified variable shapes
      •    Analytical methods
      •    Hydrogeologic mapping
      •    Numerical flow/transport models.
      The methods range from simple, inexpensive methods to highly complex and costly
ones, table 4-1 presents the WHPA delineation methods, together with places where they
have been or  are being applied.   In  any WHP program, however, it is  important to
remember that more than one method can be used to delineate a WHPA for a single well
or well field.                                    '
      The various methods of  delineating WHPA's  can be represented conceptually in  a
triangular  diagram, Figure 4-1.   The vertices (three  corner points) represent pure
applications of the three major method  types. These allow a range in sophistication—from
1 the selection of arbitrary values (e.g.,  a simple fixed  radius with no scientific basis), to
the application of highly  quantified techniques (e.g., analytical and numerical models
based on extensive site-specific data), to mapping physical features which determine the
                                         4-1

-------
                                TABLE*-!

             WHPA Delineation Methods and Example Applications
             Method
Arbitrary Fixed Radii
Example Locations Where Used
     Nebraska
     Florida
     Cape Cod!, Massachusetts
Calculated Fixed Radii
     Florida
     Vermont
Simplified Variable Shapes
Analytical  Methods
     Southern England
     Cape Cod, Massachusetts
     West Germany
     Holland
Hydrogeologic Mapping
     Vermont
     Connecticut
     Cape  Cod, Massachusetts
Numerical  Flow/Transport Models
     Southern Florida
     Cape  Cod, Massachusetts
                                     4-2

-------
                        Figure 4-1
           Interrelationships of WHPA Methods
                     QUANTITATIVE
                    ANALYTICAL, NUMERICAL
                          MODEL
         CALCULATED
             FIXED
           RADIUS
 ARBITRARY,
   FIXED
  RADIUS
                    CALCULATED AREA
                     EXTENDED TO
                      BOUNDARY
                              HYDROGEOLOGIC
                                 MAPPING
ARBITRARY
     FIXED RADIUS
   WITH EXTENSION TO
     BOUNDARIES
(PHYSICAL OR HYDROLOGIC)
PHYSICAL
FEATURES
                             4-3

-------
 geologic  or  geomorphic controls on  ground-water  flow.   Intermediate  methods  lie
 somewhere between these three "corners."
         fc        * ,                         t   	;	 '  	 «  i  •
*      WHPA's delineated by  a calculated radius based  on generalized regional  flow
 equations would be a combination of arbitrary and quantitative methods.  Regional flow
 models can be developed and used by combining th*  quantitative and physical features
 methods.  An approach that starts with a fixed radius and then extends the area to a basin
 divide would combine  the  arbitrary  and  physical features  methods.    Numerous
 permutations can be developed by combining the methods represented by the endpoints.
 4.2   WHPA DELINEATION METHOD ASSESSMENTS
    	  :        .  '  .•; s       •  •,'' ,,: _ •    . . ,/' f _ •: "i .:'• •. t: , •^. •- •; r,» ,•,.,., ,,n>;:'. • it* J: <,•..i .••:(' f< i i;..;; w- :-'	:	i..:,• :•"-.. i,• •>"	-KJ
      Various  aspects and  specific  examples of the WHPAr*^^^,!|^^ 'are'''
 discussed  in  the following  subsections.   Brief  indications  of Jh^ cp^js  inyolyed  in
 implementation and application  of  each method  are  presented  here,  though  more
 quantitative cost estimates are provided in Section 4.3.
 4^.1  Arbitrary Fixed Radii
                                                                                          In ii i i 11
       Delineation of a WHPA using the arbitrary fixed radii method involves drawing a
  circle of a specified radius around a well being protected.  The radius of the WHPA may
  be an arbitrarily selected distance criterion threshold value (Figure 4-2).  Although it may
  appear that protection areas delineated by  this  method are not  based on  scientific
  principles, the distance criteria threshold may be based on very generalized hydrogeologic
  considerations and/or professional  judgement.   For example, the distance  threshold
  selected-the radius or set of radii-could  be based on, averaging; the distances which
  correspond to a TOT threshold under various hydrogeologic settings across the State.
 Advantages.  The arbitrary fixed radii method is an easy techni(?ue for applying a distance
 criterion, can  be very  inexpensive,  and requires relatively Jlittle technical expertise.
 Using this method, WHPA's for a large number of wells can be delineated in a relatively
-short time.   The approach can be protective if  large thresholds are chosen, overriding
 somewhat its lack of hydrogeologic precision. The method can also be used to initially
 define WHPA's until a more sophisticated approach can .be adopted, as  the  need for
 accurate protection increases or more hydrogeologic data become available. The concept
 of gradually  implementing  more sophisticated approaches  is  called "phasing"  in  this
 document.                             •     	." \	',,,	   ,  .'!' .'',''
                                                                                            I
                                                                                         -1!
                                                                                            ?:;s	fill

-------
          Figure 4-2
 WHPA Delineation Using the
Arbitrary  Fixed Radius  Method
                          WHPA BOUNDARY
                                     NOT TO SCALE
            4-5

-------
 Disadvantages. -'A high degree of uncertainty complicates the application of the arbitrary
 fixed radii method, due  to the  lack of scientific basis for the criteria threshold values
«used with the method.  This can be particularly true in areais of heterogeneous and rion-
 isotropic hydrogeology or where significant hydrologic boundaries are present.  This
 method may also tend to over-  or under-protect well recharge areas.  This could add to
 costs of procuring or controlling land  use in areas that arent needed.   Conversely,
 recharge areas that should be protected may lie  outside of the fixed radius, and thus
 outside the  protection area.  If  large thresholds are chosen, however (perhaps 2 or more
 miles), a significant amount of protection could be afforded in most settings.
 Costs.  The costs of developing and implementing a WHPA program using the arbitrary
 fixed radii method are relatively low. A minimum amount of data collection is required
 to draw a circular WHPA based on a distance criterion threshold. In addition, WHPA's can
 be delineated for a large number of wells in a relatively short time.
                                                              ,
                                                            !•       '    '     '   ' j 	
 4.2.2 Calculated Fixed Radii                                                    ',
                                                                                \ '
       Delineation of a WHPA using the calculated  fixed radiii method involves drawing a
 circle for a  specified TOT criterion threshold.  A radius is calculated using an analytical
 equation that is based on the volume of water that  will be drawn to a well in the specified
 time (Figure 4-3).
      The input data required by the equation  includes the pumping rate of the well and
 hydrogeologic parameters such as porosity and hydraulic conductivity.  The time period
 used is one considered adequate to allow cleanup of ground-water contamination before it
 reaches a well, or that allows adequate dilution or dispersion of contaminants.
 Advantages.  The method is easy to apply and relatively inexpensive; it requires a limited
 amount of technical expertise. In addition, WHPA's can be delineated for a large number
 of wells in a short period of time. Conceptually, it offers a significant increase in WHPA-
 specific accuracy over the fixed-radius  method. However, this approach  requires more
 money than using arbitrary fixed radii, since time and costs may be greater, and data
 must be developed to define the  criteria thresholds  and parameters used in the equation.
 Disadvantages.  The calculated fixed radii method may  be inaccurate, since it does not
 account for  many factors that influence contaminant transport.  This can particularly be
 true in areas of heterogeneous  and non-isotropic hydrogcology  or  where significant
 hydrologic boundaries are present.
'•I! i':, , " •'" < ii1 ii-ll
                                          4-6
                                                       "I;	» , ii; iiiLiii KJ'ii' ;

-------
                 Figure 4-3
     WHPA  Delineation  Using  the
   Calculated Fixed  Radius  Method
                      LAND SURFACE
•Radius (r) is (calculated using a simple equation that incorporates
well pumping rate and basic hydrogeojogic parameters.

-Radius determines a volume of water that would be pumped from
 well in a specified time period.

H  = Open interval or length of well screen.
                                                      NOT TO SCALE

-------
 Costs.  Costs of developing and implementing a WHPA program using  calculated fixed
 radii are^relatively low.  Some initial costs may be encountered in developing the criteria
thresholds and  in  hydrogeologic data • collection.   The costs of actually mapping the
 WHPA's thereafter, however, is  relatively low, in that a large number of WHPA's can be
 delineated with a small investment of time.  In general,  the  calculated fixed radius
 method is more expensive than the arbitrary fixed radius method, because  of  more
extensive data requirements.
Example  1:  Florida.  The Florida  Department of  Environmental  Regulations (FDER)
requires that Zone D of a WHPA be defined as a circle of  a  radius (r) calculated using a
volumetric equation with a 5-year time of travel criterion.  Figure 4-4 shows the FDER
equation and an application to a well  in the Biscayne aquifer in Florida.  The volumetric
equation is shown on the figure.
Example 2: Vermont. As ah additional example, Vermont used a calculated fixed radius
equation to delineate WHPA's based  on  a drawdown criterion threshold of  0.05 foot
(Vermont Department of Water Resources, 1985). If pump test data are available for an
unconfined unconsolidated aquifer, then the radius of the primary zone of protection is
determined using the Theis nonequilibrium equation (Theis, 1935)
                  u4Tt
Where
T =
t =
S =
                      aquifer transmissivity
                      time to reach steady state
                      storativity or specific yield of aquifer
and u is a dimensionless parameter related to the well function
     :      w(U)=    M§ ;   "'"  •!;i   '"""""''	i--i^':*":'i---^"•••'•'••• ••••••••
                   1111  ,' ,  '       '    ' •'   l"il I.  " u, '„ i  i  ' ...  V  ',!•!,,•'
                                    i   I11- , " , 	   	 	• ,„•  ' : ' • i.iiii »!,,.  :,,i!!'"' 'i   „' ' ' .' „  ,' ,' ',. .
Where      s =    drawdown at the maximum radius of influence
               Q=    pumping rate
To  calculate the radius, the well function is calculated and u is  obtained from a table.
This value of u is then used to calculate the radius.
     In the case of an  aquifer in Vermont, the input'data are
               T  «   200ft2/day
               t  *   1 day    ' /      '.  '     i  '^ '    _	[ " """'^  '   '   ^''y
               S  =   0.02
               Q s   25 gpm
               s  s   0.05 feet
                                        4-8

-------
' %.-•
                       Figure  4-4
WHPA Delineation Using  FDER Volumetric Flow
            Equation  for Well  in  Florida
    PUMPING
     WELL
                                    irnH
                                           1138ft
                       WHERE
                       Q= Pumping Rate of Well • 694.4 gpm = 48,793,668 ft3/yr
                       n = Aquifer Porosity «= 0.2
                       H •= Open Interval or Length of Well Screen = 300 ft
                       t* Travel Time to Well (5 Years)

                            (Any consistent system of
                            units may be used.)

             \
  VOLUME  VOLUME OF
  PUMPED   CYLINDER
                          4-9

-------
  and the radius of the primary protection zone is 315 feet. To provide a more accurate
  WHPAj^ this  calculated  radius  is then  skewed in  the direction  of ground-water  flow
  patterns.
"' 4.Z3 Simplified Variable Shapes
       In the simplified variable shapes method, "standardized forms" are generated using
  analytical models, with  both flow boundaries and TOT used  as criteria.   This method
  attempts to simplify implementation by selecting a few representative shapes from the
  large  array of  potential possibilities.   The  appropriate ^standardized form"  is  then
  selected for hydrogeologic and pumping conditions matching or similar to those found at
  the wellhead (Figure 4-5).   The standardized form is then oriented around  the well
  according to ground-water  flow patterns.  The variable shapes are calculated  by first
  computing  the distance to  downgradient and  lateral extent!; of the ground-water flow
  boundaries  around a pumping well  (i.e., the  ZOC), and then using a TOT criterion to
 calculate the upgradient extent.  Standardized forms for  various criteria are calculated
 for different sets of hydrogeologic conditions.  Input data for the standardized shapes
 include basic hydrogeologic parameters and well pumping rates.                                  [
     • ''•         „  , '" »"'"'      ,',,"' ,    .1   ,                       III                       lilt
                 , 	;i       »•    .'   • '"• " '-:                                                           t
 Advantages.  Advantages of  the simplified variable shapes method are that it can be
 easily implemented once the shapes of the standardized forms are calculated, and that it
     , i"         •   ••	i1  •  , ' .. •  i:   ,  ••., .;        "               I'll  11 ||i   I     i        i  |    Mi    H in   i
 requires a relatively small amount of field data.  In addition, relatively little technical
               ,  • : :' , -    .   •' ., '	'   i; "..  I              '       III  I li   I      I         I   I       I I
 expertise is required to do the  actual  delineations.  Generally,  the  only information
 required to apply the shapes to a particular well or well field, once the standardized forms
                 1,.' ii     •	•,     : .•     i                   i n  i i   i    i  i j    i H  i  i    i   '   i in  i
 are delineated, are the well pumping rate, material type, and the direction of  ground-        *
 water flow.  This method offers a more refined analysis than.the fixed-radius method,
 with only a modest increase  in cost.

 Disadvantages.  The simplified variable shapes method may not be accurate in areas with
      T             .1                ,|.  , • I • I   ,  , , T •               J|!                             H
 many geologic heterogeneities and hydrologic boundaries.  There  are  some conceptual
 problems if flow directions near a  well differ from those inferred  from regional or        |
 subregional assessments.

 Costs.  Costs of initially developing the standardized forms for a specific State or locality
            	i • r •   .  ,   ,-  •   , ;    V,;' :'/:  *.•»>;», •           i   11         « i         i       i
 may be moderate, although the costs of implementation  (i.e.,  selecting the appropriate
                 < . v'i '          . •   •; :•• . :.' '.f.1-'1.:.. • TM ..          ji i  i i      in         I           i  ji
 standard shape for a well site) are relatively  low.  Significant data collection is required
 (compared  to calculated fixed  radii) in order to  obtain  the set  of representative
                  11 ;•    "   ' ,„  ,	  „      ,!'""  ,J  ''.'',.      *        „                                P
 hydrogeologic parameters needed to calculate the shapes of the standardized forms and to        |
      '            , ,11       ,  :    .   ,';'	 fi t,' •' .,,:",' " "'„•'•,•           III!  I I   I               I      I  III  II
 determine the overall ground-water flow  directions in the vicinity of specific wells.
                                          4-10

-------
                                Figure  4-5

         V    WHPA Delineation Using  Simplified
                     Variable  Shapes  Method
     STEP 1: DELINEATE STANDARDIZED FORMS FOR CERTAIN AQUIFER TYPE
                  I.
Ql >• Q2
 Pumping Rite -
              I
              3
          o
02
Q3
                      -Various standardized forms are generated
                      using analytical equations using sets of
                      representative hydrogeologic parameters.
                      •Upgradient extent of WHPA is calculated
                      with TOT equation; downgradient with
                      uniform flow equation.

     STEP 2: APPLY STANDARDIZED FORM TO WELLHEAD IN AQUIFER TYPE
                       •Standardized form is then applied to
                       well with similar pumping rate and
                       hydrogeologic parameters.

 LEGEND:
   •  Pumping Well

   I  Direction of Ground-water Flow
                                                                    NOT TO SCALE

-------
   Examples  Southern England. In England, the shapes of "standardized forms" used in the
   simplified variable shapes method are developed using uniform flow equations (Todd, 1980)
   and a TOT equation. The concern in Southern England is protection of the highly prolific,
.„ high-flow  Chalk  aquifer.   Areas  are generated  for various  sets  of representative
   hydrogeologic  conditions.   The standardized forms are then oriented around the  well
   according to ground-water flow  patterns (Southern Water Authority, 1985).

        The uniform flow equations (subsection 4.2.4) are used to calculate the zone of
   contribution to a pumping well.  These equations describe the ZOC for a confined, porous
   media aquifer  under uniform flow and steady-state conditions.  For unconfined aquifers,
   thickness is replaced by the uniform  saturated aquifer  thickness, provided that  the
   drawdown at the well is small in relation to the aquifer thickness.  These equations do not
   determine the upgradient limits  of the ZOQ. Therefore, another technique is necessary to
   dose the upgradient boundary  of the  ZOC.   The Southern Water Authority  in England
   utilizes a TOT equation.

        The distance (rx) defining  the  upgradient extent of the  ZOC is determined by
  substituting a 50-day TOT criterion for tx and solving by trial and error the equation

                         +  (rx-rw) +  Z In (Z ± r«,)
                                          *«««»A ft „£ *•»&••«». *4.«».«.l &«.._*1 .._:_.«. ^—
             =  whether point x
       Standardized forms, such as those shown in  Figure 4-6, were developed using data
 from approximately 75 different possible sets of hydrogeologic parameters with varying
 pumping rates, hydraulic gradients, storativities, and aquifer thicknesses.  When a WHPA
 is to be delineated for each well, the standardized form that most closely matches the
 pumping rate and parameters at the well is used. The standardized form is drawn over the
 well in the appropriate direction of ground-water flow.
                                                                                 i
                                         4-12

-------
         *•..'                Figure 4-6
     Examples of Standardized Forms of WHPA Delineation
                Using Simplified Variable Shapes
      (Example from Southern  England for Chalk  Aquifers)
         i
           0.5
     Natural Springs
        U-1.0k
Pumping Rate <5MI/d
Pumping Rate 5 to 15 Ml/d
  LEGEND:

   • Pumping Well
                                    -1.5km  »
  Pumping Rate >15MI/d

          DIRECTION OF GROUND WATER FLOW

           f.
SOURCE: Southern Water Authority, 1985

-------
  4.2.*  Analytical Methods
       With analytical methods, WHPA's can be delineated through the use of equation(s) to
  define ground-water flow and contaminant transport.  The uniform flow  equations (Tpdd,
* 1980) shown in Figure it-7 are often used to define the area of contribution to a pumping
  well in a sloping water table.
       Analytical methods, such as the uniform flow equations, require the input of various
  hydrogeologic parameters to  calculate  the  distance to the downgradient divide,  or
    ,,.': '       •	 ' v.v   •.   , .: ;.•  •   :•;'•;< ,i 31:•;;;..,"••»•;;       '      i  i n   I °    	ii   I  i
  stagnation point, and the width  of the ZOC to the well.  The upgradient extent of the
  WHPA can then be calculated  based on either a TOT or flow boundaries criterion.  For
  example,  the  location  of a hydrogeologic  boundary  such as a ground-water divide or
  lithologic contact, can  determine the upgradient boundary of the WHPA.  Site-specific
  hydrogeologic  parameters are required as input data for each well at which the method is
  applied.  These parameters can  include  the transmissivity, porosity,  hydraulic gradient,
  hydraulic conductivity, and saturated thickness of the aquifer.
                   . i,      • •    ; I  •: •. ''•'•; t-y t •'.''•:'	' ;;., ••:• - v.; - v""! !>'.«•'';{; :'t: Ii i«: |' K';,;' \' --;.;;' i' '*;'*;'; • .< i; \f ^.'H,'"'. '.•';.••', i, .illil i ,'Slf W f If il
       The uniform flow model can be used to calculate  distances that define the ZOC of a
    .' •  'i   "    '" . •  ' i!"      , •  ';  ','  •' ;•":;  ••.'.: J; .i-'1 - 'i:,:''  ,.; i;' i • :v;;,: •:..'• \&: ]: ^ \>: i'lMl1 v P •• •.; ji^.i'	i: ^ ,i> w; *^; :;,:«:i:: \ ^ WM	i	ti,,, lasK-i •»	
  well pumping  in a sloping water table, but generally will not calculate drawdown, which        [
  determines the area of the ZOI. For flat water tables, however, analytical models can be
  used to calculate both the ZOC and ZOI of a well because in these cases the boundaries of
•                • .   '>       • • ' •   ,  •'  ;">,•= i1, i ,.;,'i!Vi " ,., ;!.,;>•.„	v.T'.iWf.'fC.'iii	fsiiiii'iif'C'H'!.!:',':!1, ^::f~,"..'liii11	"	-'"'"i	.1 "Jf.i	i1 I;".".	i:.,;;::	is.1.';.1 ;:.~;v,",-,!;-;
  the two could closely coincide (see Chapter 3).  These calculations can be performed with
  the aid of computers.  An assessment of available computer-assisted  analytical flow and
  transport models that may be  appropriate for  WHPA  delineation is included in van  der
  Heijde and Beljin (1987). An excerpt from the draft of this report is included as Appendix        [
  D to this document.
                , •  '	"     , '   ':       "  ',• • ': 'V i ''                                   i I
                   *.'••        «    •.    ' '; •. .(•..-'  "                MI i in   i            I      i  i  i ' i ii ii
 Advantages. The method uses equations that are generally easily understood and solved
 by most hydrogeologists and civil engineers.  In addition, it takes into  account some site-
 specific hydrogeologic parameters.  It  is, furthermore, the most widely used method,
 allowing comparisons with other WHPA programs. Finally, it is considered an especially
 valid approach for assessing drawdown in the area closest to a pumping well.
 Disadvantages.  The  methods use models  that generally  do  not   take  into  account
 hydrologic boundaries (e.g., streams, canals, lakes, etc.), aquifer heterogeneities, and non-
 uniform rainfall or evapotranspiration.
 Costs. Costs of using analytical methods to delineate WHPA's are relatively low, although
 implementation costs can be high if site-specific hydrogeologic data must be developed

-------
                              Figure  4-7
                    WHPA  Delineation  Using  the
                  Uniform  Flow Analytical  Model
             ORIGINAL
            P1EZOMETRIC
             SURFACE
                               GROUND
                             Q /SURFACE
         DRAWDOWN CURVE
                                (a)
                                   IMPERMEABLE
                                EQUIPOTENTIAL LINES   S
            UNIFORM-FLOW
               EQUATION
    LEGEND:

       •  Pumping Well




SOURCE: Todd, 1950
                                  x.---
         o
       2rrKbi|
                                                           2Kb!
  DISTANCE TO
DOWN-GRADIENT
  NULL POINT
BOUNDARY
  LIMIT
       Where:
       Q*= Well Pumping Rate
       K= Hydraulic Conductivity
       b = Saturated .Thickness
       i = Hydraulic Gradient
       ir = 3.1416
                                NOT TO SCALE

-------
                                                                               r! fi'	**	f
  for each WHPA. The data may be derived from pertinent locral or regional hydrogeologic
  reports^. If reports are not available or more accuracy  is desired, data collection may

  involve site studies, "including test hole drilling and pump tests.

  Example Is Massachusetts. A town in Massachusetts has applied an analytical method to
  define a WHPA. The distance to -the downgradient stagnation point and the envelope of
  the area of contribution were calculated using the uniform flow equations, as shown in
  Figure 4-8 (Anderson-Nichols & Co., 1985).  The distance to the downgradient divide (X).
  or stagnation point at the well, was calculated using the equation
                                  feet

 where

       Q     =  pumping rate of the well = 134,760 ft3/day

       i      =  hydraulic gradient of the water table = 0.00125

       T     s  aquifer transmissivity =  14,700 ft2/day.

       The maximum width of the influx zone (Y) is calculated using the equation
       Y     =  -    = 7,334 feet.
                                                   •                ,         ••••        .
 The distance to the upgradient limit was set as the distance; to the upgradient regional
 ground-water divide, which in this case was equal to 3,800 ft.

 Example 2s   Massachusetts. Another  town in Massachusetts delineates the key  WHPA
 zone using the  uniform flow  model  to calculate the distance to the downgradient
 stagnation point and the envelope of the area of contribution (Horsley and Whitten, 1986).
 The upgradient limit is drawn as the geologic contact between the unconsolidated aquifer
 and low permeability bedrock.                                                                 r
                  '•  •        • ,    '     :  ;u> •,  '., ..... , . - .;._. •.:;^.;.'*j.V.:j:1/'  i; ;•..:• ':'"i:-   : ..:•  ........ " '. ..... i" 'l ....... r" l I .,
 Example 3s  Cape Cod. Distance-drawdown curves, analytical models, and data on local
 hydrogeology have  been used  to delineate  WHPA's  by the  Cape Cod  Planning and
 Economic Development Commission  (Horsley,  1983).  An example is shown below for a 1
 MGD well; delineation is accomplished in a three-step process.

      Step 1 involves identifying the distance to the downgradient drainage divide from a
well by a graphical  technique that involves the use of distance-drawdown curves (Figure
4-9). Three plots are  shown in  Figure 4-9.  Plot A represents the  sloping water levels         |
near the well prior  to  the  start of pumping.  Plot B represents the cone of depression         *
(drawdown) created  around the pumping well.  These two plots are used to construct Plot
C by substracting the  drawdowns from the sloping water levels.  The distance to the
downgradient  divide is  then determined* from  the shape  of  Plot C, the adjusted cone of
influence, to be about 850 feet.

     Step  2  involves  identifying the  distance  criterion  threshold to the upgradient
drainage divide. The basis for this step is the Strahler prism  model for ground-water flow
on Cape Cod (Strahler,  1966). In this step,  the well is assumed to be drawing water from         i
the top 75 feet of the aquifer, which is 225 feet thick.  Because the ratio of the well         •
depth to aquifer  thickness is Is3, the distance to the upgradient null point is assumed to
                                        4-16

-------
      v •                  Figure  4-8
      WHPA  Delineation Using Arbitrary  Fixed Radii,
      Analytical Model, and Hydrogeologic Mapping
                (Example from Massachusetts)
                     WELL
                                          APPROXIMATE DOWN-
                                         GRADIENT NULL POINT
                                                 r = 2500 FEET
           •^ /
       REGIONAL GROUND-WATER DIVIDE
  LEGEND:
    •  Pumping Well
  — ——WHPA Delineated with
        Analytical Method
        •WHPA Delineated with
        Arbitrary Fixed Radii
        Method
SOURCE: Anderson-Nichols & Co., 1985
                                4-17
                                                         NOT TO SCALE

-------
                                                         •:^B'rj','j.!tr;:"JjH:*rWi»>	lift's	\!'vW;&W"Wt:!/ii?',:W
         m
     J2  "5
      
             fl)   «.
                •
4
D  —9 »*r
II

 0)  O
 C  C
                P
         £  ""5  
    o.  o
            o
            X
                                           (Id)
                                                                                          s
                                                                                          o>
                                                                                           3


                                                                                           lii
                                                                                           O
                                                                                           (C

                                                                                           i
                                                                                                   i

-------
equal one-third the distance to the regional ground water divide, which is 10,500 feet in
the example (Figure 4-10).
           >*         .          ' ' •         •              •                  '
  4    Step 3  consists of outlining  the WHPA.  This is done by  determining the area
required to supply ground water to a well based on the annual average ground-water
recharge rate.  Once the area is determined,  it is drawn on a map using a planimeter and
the downgradient and upgradient divides as guidelines.   The final WHPA delineation for
the well is shown in Figure 4-11. For this well, the area of the WHPA was calculated by
dividing the  well pumping rate (1 million gallons per  day) by the ground-water recharge
rate (13 inches per year), and the area of the WHPA was determined to be 45,046,500 ft*.
4.2.5 Hydrogeologic Mapping
                 • •:     • •                   \          •           ,
      In many hydrogeologic settings, flow boundary and TOT criteria can be mapped by
geological, geophysical, and dye tracing methods.  The flow boundaries are defined by
lithologic variation or permeability contrasts within the aquifer.  Geological observations
may provide surface indications of litholdgy changes,  which will correlate  with WHPA
boundaries (Figure 4-12). Surface geophysical data can  be used to map the spatial extent
or thickness  of unconfined aquifers.  Hydrogeologic mapping may also include  mapping of
ground-water levels in order to identify ground-water drainage divides, as shown in Figure
4-13.                                                                   •
      Delineation  of upland carbonate aquifers having rapid recharge into conduit karst
during storm events can be done initially by topographic  analysis of drainage basin divides,
supplemented by mapping the  water  table using water levels  in wells and springs.
Subsequent refinement of conduit  recharge  patterns is possible  by using  dye tracing
techniques, especially during high-flow conditions. Under such conditions, sub-basins can
become integrated or even spill  over into other basins, reflecting the complex nature of
karst systems.  Although less frequently reported in  scientific literature,  these methods
can also be  used to delineate recharge and flow systems in  non-carbonate fractured
bedrock aquifers.
Advantages.  Hydrogeologic mapping is well suited to  hydrogeologic settings dominated by
near-surface flow boundaries, as are found in many glacial and alluvial aquifers with high
flow velocities,  and to highly anisotropic aquifers, such  as fractured bedrock and conduit-
flow karst.
Disadvantages.  The method requires  specialized expertise in geologic and  geomorphic
mapping, plus significant judgment on what constitute likely flow boundaries.   This
method is also less suited to delineating WHPA's in large or deep aquifers.
                                         4-19

-------
                                 Figure 4-10

             WHPA Delineation  Using Analytical Models

                Step 2:  Identify Upgradient  Null Point

                     Based on Strahler  Prism Model

               (Example from Cape Cod, Massachusetts),
            REGIONAL GW  •  Dp-Gradient
           ./DIVIDE          Mull poinf
          (EXAGGERATED PROFILE)
                                                             WELL DEPTH
                                                               SEA
                                                              LEVEL
    -400
SOURCE: Hor»ley, 1983
                                                2 - Wall Depth - SO FEET

                                                b - SatiiHttd Thickness - 225 FEET


                                                RATIO-?*25' " 0-33
                                                      ' D

                                           LEGEND:
                                                ZONE OIF CONTRIBUTION
                                                AQUIFER SATURATED THICKNESS
                                                DIRECTION OF GROUND-WATER
                                                FLOW
^.  WATER TABLE




2 - WELL DEPTH









                  NOT TO SCALE
                                                                                  B

-------
                  Figure 4-11
 WHPA Delineation Using Analytical Models
Step 3:  WHPA Delineation Using Upgradient
        and Downgradient  Null Point
   (Example from Cape Cod, Massachusetts)
                         UP-GRADIENT NULL POINT
                      DOWN-GRADIENT NULL POINT
                                         2000 Feet
        ZONE OF CONTRIBUTION - WHPA
 SOURCE: Hartley, 1983
                                  LEGEND:
                                       Contour Line
                                       Pumping Well
                       4-21

-------
                           Figure  4-12
  WHPA  Delineation Using Hydrogeologic Mapping
                 (Use  of Geologic  Contacts)
                                                    STREAM
         PUMPING WELL
BEDROCK (NON-AQUIFER
     MATERIAL)
                              ALLUVIAL AQUIFER
 .__   Primary WHPA Boundary Drawn as Contact
          Between Aquifer and Non-Aquifer Material
NOTE: A secondary protection zone could be delineated based on
      the larger area of recharge derived from surface runoff, and
      inferred from topography and basin boundaries.
                                                                                   I
                                                             NOT TO SCALE
                              4-22
                                                                                   B

-------
    V -;
                       Figure  4-13
  WHPA Delineation Using Hydrogeologic Mapping
             (Use of Ground-water Divides)
                                           LAND SURFACE
              WHPA
 STREAM
 VALLEY
   STREAM
         I
WHPA
DRAWDOWN
CONTOURS
/
GROUND-WATER
   DIVIDE
LEGEND:
      Water Table
      Pumping Well
     •Ground-water Divide
      Direction of Ground-waiter Flow
      WHPA
                            4-23

-------
  Costs. tCosts of developing and implementing a wellhead protection  program using

  hydrogeologic mapping are variable.  Costs may be relatively low if considerable data are

  already available or if the general  hydrogeology of the ground-water system  is  known.

  The particular type of hydrogeologic  mapping technique used wiill also determine costs. In          •

  general, geophysical techniques are the  most costly, followed by mapping  of geologic

  contacts,  dye  tracing,  regional  water  level mapping, and  basin delineation using

  topographic mapping. Costs may be high if little hydrogeologic information is available in
  an area and if test holes and/or pump tests are necessary to confirm the mapping.

  Example:  Vermont.  Vermont utilizes a method in which mapping of geologic contacts is          [
  combined with simplified fixed-ring calculations (subsection 4.2.2) (Vermont Department
  Water Resources, 1985).  In an example from Vermont (shown in Figure 4-14), a primary
  protection area is delineated using hydrogeologic  calculations while  a secondary  area is
  delineated with hydrogeologic mapping  of  the   well's  recharge area.   Hydrogeologic
  mapping in this case is based on physical  boundaries and  the prevailing topography, with
   •  assumption that shallow local ground-water flow mirrors topography.

       Hydrogeoiogic mapping has also been used to  delineate parts of WHPA's in a town in         *
  Massachusetts,  where the  upgradient  extent of  the  WHPA  is formed  by the regional         I
 ground-water  divide, as shown in Figure 4-8.

 Other Hydrogeologic Mapping Tools

 Tracer Tests.  Tracing techniques can be used to  map underground conduits by injecting
 dyes or tracers into a ground-water  system.  The dye is introduced into a  sinkhole or

 stream that flows into ground water suspected to flow  to the supply source for which the         r

 WHPA is being delineated. Water from the supply well or stream is then monitored  and/or

 observed for a period of time that is adequate for the tracer to reach the supply.  If the

 tracer is detected in the supply, the source from which the tracer was injected becomes

 part of the WHPA. Existing contaminants in ground water can also be used as tracers to

 delineate flow to water supply wells.  If the source of contamiinants to a well is known,

 the infprmation can be used to better understand ground-water flow in the area, and the         g
 specif ic sources of water in the well.      "         '  '	'""	'"'	'  "	"
                   '.'.•; ,     •    •  •,    -  "'I ':.   "' • '. : ",  • ''•" >ii;'r'i.':>""'I 'f!!"!'li'L	•.•«' i ;.>.' .,•'' • ••"•>,	'.  "': **'(••". • y,1-1 '.•,'',',: ,;','•• Bi:1"1:!11';1 i •npi^rWrf
      '•; " i.    .       iii;,-|ll.     ..  '  : .. ;, "   " .    [ •' .. IM •,'• .;".*.,; ':,.!.!'.••;,,•' 	,'' '* .''j' 1.!MJifflK'r I V1^1 i'!''':'•'':'( i •' '.'/:ij '^  .-','!,'>'f'V;	V'" S' '*•,' t '.''.'"li SR ';'$$
      Example: Kentucky. Dye tracing has been used to delineate ZOC's to water  supply
 springs in Kentucky (Quinlan and Ewers, 1985). In the example  shown (Figure 4-15),  the
 ZOC  tp a  spring supplying a town differs from a ZOC that would be interpreted from
observing topography and mapping potentiometric surfaces. In this example, although the
spring was  hydraulically downgradient from a contaminated  pond, dye tracing revealed
that the spring would not be affected.
      .'':  '       .   ;"..»  " -  •   :::,:: ', '  . •' .  , '               ,'   ' '   ''I   '         i          •	 '"'	 I
Geophysics.  Surface  geophysical techniques have also been  applied  in aquifer mapping

investigations.   These techniques measure the surface response of  subsurface elastic,
                    •       '  • ,•  •  • .••..                   "     Hi   i           '      i      i    I  i  i
                                         4-24
                                                                                               I

-------
                           Figure 4-14
                    WHPA Delineation Using
                    Hydrogeologic Mapping
                    (Example from  Vermont)
              * Primary Area
              (Secondary Area-
               Topographic Divi
              PRIMARY AREA (STRATIFIED DRIFT)
              SECONDARY AREA (TILL AND BEDROCK)
SOURCE: Vermont Dept. of Water Resources. 1985
                               4-25

-------
                                      Figure  4-15
        VWH PA Delineation  Using  Hydrogeologic Mapping:
                   Dye Tracing (Example  From  Kentucky)
                    Potentiometric surface
                    Traced flow route
                    Sinking spring
                    Spring-fed stream
                    Intermittent stream
      Sinking stream
. . • •       ZOC of spring A based on
      mapping of potentiometric surface
  A   Municipal water supply spring
—-*»- Inferred direction of ground-water flow
                     Sinking stream B was found to not be in ZOC of spring A,
                     although this would be inferred from potentiometric surface.
                                                                                               i
Modifttd from Quintan and Ewert. 1985
                                                                         NOT TO SCALE
                                         4-26
                                                                                               i

-------
density, electrical, or magnetic contrasts.  The resulting subsurface interpretations can
provide information on the lithologic and hydrologic characteristics of unconfined aquifer
systems.
     The nature of the hydrogeologic setting, deter mines the applicability of a particular ,
geophysical method. In many ground-water studies, several different  geophysical methods
are applied to the same survey area. In general, the selection  of a geophysical technique
depends on: the physical nature of the survey area, the desired depth of penetration, the
data resolution requirements, and the available resources.
  v         '         '.•'•"'•''•...'.»   .''..';       ."..-"       '   •  .
     Geophysical  methods model the subsurface environment according to simplifying
assumptions.  Subsurface  interpretations are  generally improved  when information from
test borings or observation wells are available to constrain the data sets.  One common
strategy  is to  use surface geophysical data to  correlate  between  boreholes or to
extrapolate borehole information into new terrain.  In these surveys, surface geophysics
functions as a rapid, inexpensive alternative to test drilling.
     WHPA  delineation programs can  use surface geophysics to  map the subsurface
boundaries in  unconfined aquifer systems.   In these boundary delineation studies, seismic
refraction and electrical resistivity techniques have been applied  most consistently, with
gravity and  magnetic methods having  only  secondary applications.  However,  recent
technological  advances have resulted in the development of  new techniques that have
ground-water  applications.  Table 4-2 summarizes some of the technical characteristics,
applications, advantages, and  limitations of the  geophysical techniques that have been
used in ground-water investigations, based on a report  by  the Office of Ground-Water
Protection (1987).
Age Assessment, (Tritium). An indication of recent leakage or paths of rapid recharge into
a confined aquifer  is the presence of tritium in concentrations greater than atmospheric
background, a consequence of the presence  of post-1954 tritium from atmospheric testing
of nuclear weapons.  In precipitation, tritium from cosmic ray bombardment of the upper
atmosphere has a quite low concentration and is variable with latitude, season, and local
meteorological parameters.  Thus ground water from atmospheric precipitation  prior to
1952 has quite low concentrations relative to the enhanced levels subsequent to 1954.
     The presence of tritium  in ground water at higher  concentrations (unless it results
from radioactive waste disposal) can be used to determine roughly ground-water age and
origin. In confined aquifers, for example, the existence of leaks in pathways could  be
                                         4-27

-------
UJ
-J

to
   i
B
u
   f
              '.III
              I
                 iii M
                      5 i 5IIg4
                      l":j|if
                   ft  im
             S!

             flF

             ii]
             $•3
            !l!

            I

            h
Ii

-i
u S
                     £

                     1
                     HI
                     w> e
        1*

         !
        5s
                                         I
                                         i
                                             sir

                                             ii
                                             11
                                             It
                                   ™     "•    a •»



                                   I     I    lit
              *l.

              Hii
              «*«?
£

!i
                               Hi]
i=L
1112
!!!i

l1^!
Sfy*
*ia
flf
S^f I
                         IL
                                                  Jj
4i
Good vertical rci
•two •! rivet i*f
Uyen
ill
Eicellenl Ulcral
nlulMni foot m
Mklhllion*! !*•
1
Same at Electron
ln*Klt«i
-------
determined and the extent of WHPA's could thus be modified according to the locations of
           •Lf'T •* '        '               •  -          _  |      t'i\ .      >.--.-     •
such pathways.  Ground water is frequently a. mixture of waters of different ages and
sources,  which can complicate age-determination of the major portion  of recharge.
Because leakage into a confined aquifer can short-circuit into ground water from  other
recharge paths, water having a much greater isotopic age (as can be measured by carbon
1* dating) may be present also.
     Trichlorofluoromethane  (CC13F) is Of anthropogenic origin  and has been in  the
atmosphere  for about fifty years.   It is an additional  possible tracer of  leakage into
confined aquifers  (Thompson  and Hayes, 1979), although it does not have well-defined
chemical  and physical behavior during ground water flow as does tritium.  CCl^F is
subject to adsorption and desorption phenomena that affect its concentrations in ground
water (Russell and Thompson, 1983).
     It appears that detection of significant tritum concentrations in confined aquifers
may be one of the most expedient initial methods of evaluating the leakiness of confining
strata  in the short term.  It must be kept in mind that mere leakiness of an aquifer is not
equivalent to finding contamination by a pollutant,  merely an indication of the existence
of a possible pathway should a contaminant subsequently be introduced to that part of the
flow system.
4.2.6 Numerical Flow/Transport Models
                                                                    >       •      v •,   . =
     WHPA's can be  delineated using computer models that approximate  ground-water            •>
flow and/or  solute transport equations numerically.  A wide variety of numerical models is
presently  available both  commercially  and  through  organizations  such  as the U.S.
Geological  Survey (USGS), Holcomb Institute's  International Ground-Water Modeling
Center (IGWMC), and the National Water Well Association (NWWA).
     Numerical flow/transport  models are  particularly  useful for delineating  WHPA's
where  boundary and hydrogeologic conditions are complex. Input data may include such             i
hydrogeologic parameters  such as  permeability, porosity,  specific yield, saturated
thickness, recharge rates, aquifer geometries, and  the locations of hydrologic boundaries.
Solute transport parameters such as dispersivity may also be incorporated in  these models.
     Depending upon the size  of the area to be modeled and the number of  cells or
elements, these models can be run on a mainframe or microcomputer.  Intermediate-type            i
models that use combinations of analytical methods to generate head field distributions            *
and numerical methods to generate particle tracing maps are also available. Such models
may not account for all boundary conditions at a site, however.

                  '  ' ''    .          •  .  4-29  '           •'         v      '

-------
        Criteria  such as  drawdown,  flow boundaries,  and TOT  may  be mapped  using
 ^  numerical methods, typically in a two-step procedure.  First,  a hydraulic  head field
*  distribution  is  generated with  a numerical  flow model under  a prescribed set of
   hydrogeologic parameters and conditions, and with a selected flow boundaries criterion to
   determine the extent of the modeling domain.  Second, a 'rui^ri^'wauim transport model
  that uses the generated head field as input calculates the WHIPA based on the preselected
  criterion.   Figure  4-16  illustrates a  flow chart of some typical  components of  this
  procedure. Some information from a draft report on available numerical models that may
  be appropriate  for  WHPA delineation |s  included as Appendix D  to  this report (van der
  Heijde and Beljin,1987).  An additional, useful guide for model selection |s provided in a
  report by the EPA Office of Research and Development (1987).
 Advantages.  This method provides a very high potential degree of accuracy and can be
 applied to nearly all types of hydrogeologic settings.   The models can also be used to
 predict the dynamic aspects of  the  WHPA  such  as changes in the size of the WHPA
 resulting from  natural  or man-caused  effects.  .Specific ..advantages and disadvantages
 associated with individual models are  reviewed ii, the  report "Model Assessment  for
 WHPA Delineation" by IGWMC (Beljin and van derHeijde, i987).
 Disadvantages,   Costs for  this method are  usually  relatively higher than  others.
 Considerable technical  expertise  in hydrogeology and  modeling is required to use this
 method. However, the cost may be warranted in areas where a high degree of accuracy is
 desired. Due  to limitations on model grid spacing and density, numerical models are less
 suitable than analytical  methods in assessing drawdowns close to pumping wells.  For this
 reason,  WHPA delineation in The Netherlands in recent years has focused on combining
 analytical methods for the near-field and numerical models for the bulk of the protection
 area.                      	• 	'	,	
Costs.  Costs of developing and implementing a numerical model to delineate WHPA's can
be relatively high, depending upon  the  availability and quality of data, the number of
wells, and the complexity of the hydrogeplpgy. However, if .adequate data bases exist and
the  hydrogeology of  the area is  known, numerical  models  can  be cost  effective.
Numerical modeling can also be less expensive if relatively homogeneous hydrogeologic
conditions exist and extensive data input  is not necessary. In this case, a large number of
"default Values"  for  some  of  the hydrogeologic parameters can be used, while using
better-known values for the more sensitive parameters.
                                       4-30
                                                                                        i i
                                                                                            B

-------
                      Figure4-16
        Simulation Procedure Used in WHPA
        Delineation with Numerical  Modeling
  INPUT PARAMETER/
BOUNDARY CONDITIONS
 FOR A GIVEN PERIOD
        I
     RUN HEAD
    SIMULATION
    FOR ABOVE
    CONDITION
        I
      OUTPUT"
    HEAD FIELD
7
                              CHOOSE MODEL
                              DEPENDING ON:
                           PROPERTIES OF SYSTEM
                           AVAILABLE DATA
                           AVAILABLE RESOURCES
NO
                         DO THEY
                         COMPARE?
                              YES
                          MODEL
                         HAS BEEN
                        CALIBRATED
                            I
                          MAKE
                        PREDICTIVE
                           RUN
                            1
                        RUN TRAVEL
                           TIME
                        SIMULATION
                           I
                         INTERPRET
                         RESULTS
                             'STANDARD^
                                FOR
 sCALIBRATION

      I
   MEASURED
  WATER LEVEL
FOR SAME PERIOD
                           4-31

-------
 Example:  Florida.  The  Counties of Broward,  Dade, and  Palm  Beach in Florida use
 numerical ground-water models to delineate WHPA's.  Figure 4-17 shows a map with the
^numerically generated 30-day, 210-day, and 500-day TOPs (based on the multiple WHPA
 zone approach) for a well field in the Biscayne aquifer.         .   -
 4.3  WHPA DELINEATION METHOD COSTS
     ,!•     •       >>•>!!    •                       i             III
      Estimates of potential  costs for each  of  the six WHPA delineation methods are
 shown in Table 4-3. These are rough estimates on a per-well basis, considering labor costs
 and level of  expertise required for each method.   The table also includes potential
 overhead costs that  may  be encountered with each method,  Jilthough dollar figures  have
 11 • . ! ' '.         ,  • :';*!;;  •  •'.. ,, ••  • ,:•'..;     i       n    ,    i  i  fHi1 nI IM  i,n     i  in i   i,i\  	
 not been assigned to overhead.  Labor costs for the various  levels of expertise are based
 on a survey by the National Water Well Association on salaries of ground-water scientists
 in the United'States (NWWA, 1985). The costs are expressed in uninflated dollars.
      Several assumptions built into the figures in Table 4-3 include:
      •    WHPA's will be delineated by personnel and staff at  the agency in charge of
           the WHPA program, possibly aided by consulting firms.
      •    Each method requires a different level of technical expertise to apply.
      •    Data on hydrogeology of the areas in which WHPA's are being delineated are
           relatively available, although some data  collection  and searching  may  be
           required. •          	           ,   	"'  '•	•	  •	
      Manhour requirements for each method have been projected in ranges of hours. The
 higher end of the range  may apply If a relatively large amount of data collection is
 required or the data are not readily available.  It may  also apply if the personnel are
 unfamiliar with WHPA delineation methods  and/or have not reached a  level on  the
 "learning curve*1 where WHPA's can be delineated efficiently. The lower end of the range
 of manhours may apply if data are generally easily available and/or the personnel doing
 the delineation are familiar with and have used the delineation  methods.  For estimates in
 Table 4-3, it was assumed that the average annual salary estimated from that survey was
 roughly  equivalent to that of a mid-level  hydrogeologist. Salaries of other levels were
 then estimated from that figure.
                                                                         : * »• *
                   ,                             „  ,   .           ,    ,            ,
      Potential overhead costs include those for equipment to collect hydrogeologic data,
                                                                                   iM& S8\ >,
computer  hardware  and software, and  the costs associated with  report  preparation,
including typing and creating maps and  figures.  In general,  if many of these items are
already available to the agency or organization doing the delineation, potential overhead
                                         4-32

-------
      \;               Figure 4-17
Numerical Model Application to Biscayne Aquifer Well Field
                                500 Day Travel Time
  30 Day Travel Time
   210 Day Travel Time
                                     Wellhead
                         4-33

-------
V
                   3
                                                                                                                           J.
e- -c
j|
• - o
,11" :

4
1 i*
J °S
tu
J™ A
E? 4to< At
i 1-

IU T>
CO *•* ^S\
•^ «2 2
*" S 2 fe
*jQ X Q
i 11

=
1
"o
42
M
a
1

,
.

.•
. , SS — >if '_
-» -> 3 S - JC _

,
• i '' '
^
.« *^ "N o o 2
g^ CN CM 5 0 g^
J7v •* — « «*\ so J^
v'    -v> 3 ,
^
00
a*
•b
—« CM CM «*\ m «• <
1
s O t> ^*
•S< t 1 ^_ •m»*» ^a «• !•*
*^y ^r *•» ^M MM C* <>4
«O «M c ' ,/ " V1"1
•^
•*
1 1 If
1
III K
'






§s§^
O CM •(-> 1*.
^K^>^>

«
w ^« \
^)0^ I
JS1
111
1 2 ~9
llll
IrSr *
5* S3"
^5"?^
s c *o e
ZnSj)
""* . *^ *^

1
...,'-., ':. • •• .. • > ,,:;.: ,^,1.
l:''"1' 	 '••:i|-h1-1: .••.-.•••... •••*^-^ "' 	 •.>•;> 	 •!**•* 	 *• • 	 « 	

-------
 costs  become  less significant.  .These figures do not reflect costs for consulting firms
        -'*••'                "            '      •          '•  -               '  -
 potentially engaged in.this work.  It should  be noted that the greatest expenses are
 typically related to data acquisition, and these are clearly State- and WHPA-specific.
 4.4   WHPA COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS    ....."'
                                             1 -      ,       \       •   .
      Once a desired criterion and criterion threshold have been selected, one  or more
 WHPA delineation method(s) will be chosen to "map" the criterion.  To aid  in method
 selection,  a comparative analysis  of delineated areas resulting from different  methods
 may be performed.  Results of this comparison should consider relative accuracy, ease of
 implementation, and costs. For  example, if a fixed radius method were being  considered
 for delineating WHPA's in an entire State, a comparative analysis for a limited number of
 wells  using  more sophisticated  (and presumably  more  accurate)  methods  could help
 determine  if the simpler and less costly method provides adequate results. Examples of
 comparative analyses of WHPA delineations done for actual wells in several locations are
 described in detail in Appendix B.
     Two  approaches  can be used in  WHPA comparative analyses.  One approach is to
 compare areas of protection that result from applying the  same method of delineation to
 different hydrogeologic settings.  A second approach is to compare areas of  protection
 that result from applying different methods of delineation to the same hydrogeologic
 setting.
     With  any analysis, a basic assumption is made that there is one method that provides
 results most indicative of actual conditions. Once the various areas have been  delineated
 in the  comparative analysis, the  tradeoffs of  accuracy versus  costs  versus speed of
implementation, can be more fully considered in any given State or hydrogeologic setting
within  a State.
     Figure  4-18 conceptually illustrates' the effects of accuracy on  the  degree of
protection  and ease of implementation.  If the area delineated by a method is smaller than
that delineated by the  method assumed to  be  the most accurate, under-protection may
occur.  This may result in possible degradation of water supplies. If the area is too large
relative to the accurate method,  over-protection may occur and result in implementation
problems.  The common European "rule" for determining the extent of WHPA's is "as large
as necessary, as small as possible."
                                        4-35

-------
                       
                      o
                      o
 g
 a
 i.
 a>

O
                                                      E
                                                      0)
  >
JK
 D
 C

<
 s»
 o O
 w ^^
 0) **-
D.
X
                      c

                     w>
                      O
                      o
^o

 u

"S
 a
 c
JO

"5
T3
 O

 O)

O

 >.
*•
• ^

"5

O
                                                    en
                                                    o
                                                    0*
                                                                                   f
                             4-36
                                                 B

-------
 4.5   METHOD SELECTION CONSIDERATIONS
          • ' ,\:. -1    '       ''-'•'     '    '      •   ' •           •   .  '•      '
      The amount of effort required to select a method is largely reduced once the desired
 criterion has been selected/That is, the method selected  must be suitable to map or
 delineate the  selected criterion or criteria.   For example, if the criterion selected is
           '                                '  -            .             -  .
 distance, then the only appropriate methods to map distance are arbitrary fixed radii and
 hydrogeologic  mapping.   Table 4-4 shows the suitability of each method to  map  each
 criterion,  A detailed technical discussion of the approaches to selecting analytical or
 numerical models (either  two-dimensional or three-dimensional) for  a typical  glacial,
 stratified-drft, river-valley aquifer In New England is provided by Morrissey (1987).
      As  in the case of criteria selection (Section 3.4), choosing a method depends on
 various technical and policy considerations.  The choice  of method is tied less  to the
 protection goal,  however, than to the accuracy of delineation desired,  and the financial
 resources available for delineation.
 4.5.1 Technical Considerations
      To guide the States in the  process of selecting a method, a matrix  of technical
 evaluation factors versus methods is presented as Table 4-5.  The matrix is blank to allow
 the  States or local agencies  to  assign their own rankings according to  site-specific
' '         ''        '            • \ ', '              ,        .                '
 conditions.   An  "H"  (High)  ranking implies that the method is relatively  useful  or
 beneficial in satisfying the technical consideration.  The  factors that might be used to
 evaluate the method are described below. Understanding the basis of the method and the
 input data requirements, applying  the method, and evaluating the method's results are all
 significant considerations.
Extent of Use. It is useful to identify how commonly the method is used (e.g., whether it
is presently used by regulatory agencies or is in the process of being adopted).
Simplicity of Data.  The  amount  and types of data required for method application are
quite significant.  The data required may be site-specific (i.e., developed specifically for
 method application) or regional (i.e., approximate and already available).
Suitability for a  Given  Hydrogeologic Setting.   An  important consideration  is  the
capability of a method to  be  applied to the hydrogeologic setting in the  State.  It may be
important to evaluate how suitable the  method would be to incorporate the effects of
"sources" and "sinks,"  boundary  conditions,  variable  aquifer parameters,  and other
 technical factors.                                             .
                                         4-37,

-------
                                                             "I1 	" . . , " 'Ml, i
    o
   •c
    G)
O  G)
   O

   Q>
3 fc -
, in ™~ f
£>p 5
_ — < JE
•5 o -
«—
§< ?
if !
«. !
1 ?
i -
BC """
0
Ul
< s-

fe J
D —
E /
Ul /
/ °
/ "*


^
z


<
z
z

z




••


1 ARBITRARY FIXED
RADIUS


^^ .•
Z


<
z
«

1




^^
z

CALCULATED FIXED
RADIUS


*f
.^


1 ^
Z
&•

Z




^^
z

SIMPLIFIED
VARIABLE SHAPES



S


<
Z
X

X




^f
z

1 ANALYTICAL
MODELS



S



Z
=

X

-


<
2

(NUMERICAL FLOW/
TRANSPORT MODELS



z •



X
z

z





X

IHYDROGEOLOGIC
MAPPING
                                                                                                         I
                                              4-38

-------
    M
    O
    u
Tf



2
 o
^0)  0)
   .0
   ^c

    o
  ,  ^f



  <

z -. . •
* T
i =
GC
i ^
I ^
-gosS

t>>o| §
vt ~ IS v>
NB i
cc
I?i 1
III -1
«" —o *
uj 5 ^
/
u X .
•~ x^
X H
/ *



-
*














O
UJ
X
u.
ARBITRARY
RADII






. ' •











o •
UJ
X
uT
O
CALCULATE
RADII


:




.'











i

SIMPLIFIED
VARIABLE S










.'


., '






_i
ANALYTICA
METHODS



















u
o
HYDROGEOL
MAPPING


















&
«^.._j
>UJ
5§
u-S
NUMERICAL
TRANSPORT




0>*
2
1
I
.£2
o>
•8

1
•A
O
• E

c •
CD
C
I
o
z




-LOW
-MEDIUM
-HIGH
-J5X
                                                                                            I
                                                                                            I
                                     4-39

-------
 Accuracy.   It is important to  consider the  degree to which  the results from method
 application can be expected to compare with actual field conditions.
       **"         • •             .             .         .' .........    '..;!••
 4.5.2 Policy Considerations
      To aid in the process of selecting a method, an evaluation matrix of methods versus
 policy considerations is presented as Table 4-6. The matrix has 'been teft blank,' so that an
 appropriate  ranking of each method may be made by a State or locality in its selection
 process. The policy considerations are described below.
                       '       •  '"        "               "
Ease of Understanding.  It is important to consider the degree to which the principles
underlying the method can be readily understood by nontechnical people.
Economy of Application. The relative cost incurred in applying a method to one wellhead,
                                       ,    ,..''..  ".'. ,    ... , ........ .. ...... . ., ' , ,  .... ,,, '. ..... ;  . . |. ,, ........ , :
well field, or the main fields in a .State may do much to inhibit or encourage its use.
Factors that may affect costs include data acquisition, professional labor, computer time,
graphics, and reporting.
Def ensibility.  Enforcement and permitting considerations will require that the boundaries
of a WHPA be clearly defined and defended against potential  challenges and litigation
from parties affected by the delineation.
Relevance to Protection Goal.  As mentioned in subsection 3.3.1, WHPA delineation will
reflect an overall policy/protection goal. The relevance to this goal of  the  methodology
under consideration by the State is a key factor in program success.
                                                                                              I
                                        4-40

-------
   «A

   C
   X
   w
 i  •:
^-  2


•sl
   o>
  in

  -o
   O


  1
CC
ui O
II* i
Juo" si
•J c
ui a.
ec
5 —
m z
V) 5
Z •- ^
ui • si
u.
o
z
isil 1
8 . ii S
UI &
.
6
Su.10 I
w ° g 5 jl
o —
3
>P/
38 /
0 / Q
°- / 0
/ UI






















ARBITRARY FIXED
RADIUS











= .










CALCULATED FIXED
RADIUS
• '.
•


,







-









SIMPLIFIED
VARIABLE SHAPES











',










ANALYTICAL
MODELS
-





-'














1
NUMERICAL FLOW/
TRANSPORT MODELS
'





















HYDROGEOLOGIC
MAPPING














s
.t
•s
«
10
"s
VI
•S
8
E
ji
fa
O)
c
n
1
                                                   UI


                                                   CD
                                                   <

                                                  x0

-------
i

-------
                                     CHAPTER 5
           , t            • -                 •        ,    - .  • •    •-     „•'?••-.      "
1 '   .  ..       ki. •   -        '-   • '     -    '  .            ' •'          ',      '.    •     '•'
                  EXAMPLE OF CRITERIA AND METHOD SELECTION
 '•**•'             :                  '•  • .                        .-                  •'

      An example of the steps that a regulating agency  might consider in a WHPA
 delineation  is  provided  in  this chapter.  The example is  not meant  to be the only
 appropriate  procedure.   The  approach  eventually selected must reflect the specific
 protection goal and other technical and policy considerations that a State might use in
 meeting the requirements of the Safe Drinking Water Act.
       1                                      *               ,
      Variations and diversities exist in both hydrogeologic settings and State regulatory
 programs in the  United  States.  Certain programs may find  that  their environmental
 policies and resources lend themselves  to one procedure, while those elsewhere make
 another approach more suitable.  Consequently, numerous  issues should be  thoroughly
 examined and evaluated.  These include water supply well construction regulations and
 practices in use; organizational and institutional capabilities  of State and local agencies
 to provide appropriately skilled  personnel, equipment,  materials, and  implementation
 funding; and type and complexity of the hydrogeologic settings in the State.  A careful
 examination of these matters will  greatly facilitate selection of the most appropriate
 delineation criteria, methodologies, and strategies for implementation. Guidance on these
 management-related issues is provided in other resource documents prepared by EPA.
      The example of the criteria and method selection process for the hypothetical State
 is organized in the following manner:
      •    Description of the WHPA delineation problem
      •    Evaluation  matrices  for  degree  of  protection,  technical,  and  policy
           considerations
      •    Summary of final decision reached by the hypothetical State.
                     '        •  '          /              •      . •                .
 5.1   PROBLEM STATEMENT: THE HYPOTHETICAL STATE
      The hypothetical State is establishing a  wellhead protection  program  under  the
 SDWA.  A panel  of experts has been established with both technical and nontechnical
 expertise.  The panel's work was conducted under the following assumptions, developed by
 previous State planning and research:
      •    Aquifers requiring  the greatest  protection  are  mostly unconfined aquifers
           comprised of unconsoiidated sands or sands and gravels.
                                         5-1

-------
             Certain industries will be affected by the WHPA program, and the threat of
         V litigation has  been raised.   The  technical  basis of  the WHPA delineation
             program may, therefore,  be challenged.
            It is estimated that available technical personnel from State agencies will be
            able to perform all analyses  and mapping of the WHPA* in an expedient
            manner.
                   '•\  ••' -   '  /.' •    ••  !i;  ' :i.. '••'.• ^'-;i':'v'^;^;;;!fl
            Degree of protection considerations have established ^at tije goal of WHPA
            delineation will be to provide management of the  well-field area.   It  is
                    ,ii,          „  ,! "     „'  "!' i!  ' |    ' "  "    ' '" '  '"" ....... "'' "' ...... ''"' ' ' ..... '  ........  : dl '-" ' ' '"ll '    " ' ! .........
            expected  that three different  protection zones will be established to protect
            against each type of threat (physical, microbial, and chemical). These will be
            labeled Zones I, II, and HI, respectively.
                                        Tn           ,,  , ,  ,
            Approximately 900 wellheads will be in the first phase for delineation relative
            to chemical threats (i.e., Zone IH).
      •     A program to inform the general public of the developing wellhead protection
            efforts will be implemented.

      •     The State, in cooperation with county and local agencies, has the authority to
            impose land use controls within the zones.

 5.2   EXAMPLE OF CRITERIA SELECTION

 5.2.1 Overall Protection Goals
      As  noted in the  problem statement,  the hypothetical  State's goal is to provide
 management of the  well-field area.   The panel was asked to examine and recommend
 delineation criteria  based  on both technical and policy  considerations. These separate
 analyses, in addition  to the panel's final recommendations, are outlined below.
      i,             ,   ,     ".,   "  • i     '•'''" i       ' ' " «           "'
 5.2.2 Technical Considerations

      As noted in the problem statement (subsection 5.3.2),' most of the aquifers requiring
                   i                     •••            .   •;. ,  • 	a	 T,I », - i ,  i 7* . ..•:	 , 	, • ^	 ,   P	
 protection in the hypothetical State are unconfined,  porous  media units.  Based On this,

 the panel evaluated  the technical  merits  (subsection 3.4.3) of the  delineation criteria,
 focusing primarily  on the 900 high-priority wells.  The  completed evaluation matrix is         «
 illustrated as Table 5-1.

      Based on this evaluation, the panel decided that the  criterion providing the strongest         |
technical basis for  WHPA delineation was TOT, with  a threshold value of 15 years.  The
                     1 if                 'I,        r         . . .  	|, ! '",!!','• |	 i  ,•''.,,'. i  • , .   , .

-------
      Q.


      O
           £<-^
           egii
   CO

   .2o

  •si
     1
 i  ««
•n
     2
   o o
  U) &
UJ Ul
          -JOC
                  «J
    "o
         CJUI
         uiO
               UI
DISTANCE
                           .CM
DRAWD

                                 -' <**
                               •5E
                                  -^


                                   :

                                  ,^
                                  ' -
                                      CO
                                      UI
FL

BOUNDA

                                     i

                                     i


                                     M
                                     10
                                     • •
                                     8>


                                     "i
                                     i


                                     ui
                               UI

                               h
                               fi
                                 u
                                         CO*  §

                                         «  i
                                         a!  u
Ssx i
 i i  i<
                            5-3

-------
 relationships between the TOT criterion (and the other criteria) and each of the technical
 considerations are summarized by the rankings in Table 5-1 and are detailed below.
 Ease of Application.  Ease of application was not judged to be a significant impediment in
'the hypothetical State. The State's technical staff was deemed capable  of understanding          i
     „: : ,      '     ,• , 'in I'M  •  .«' .   ., i, „ " ; ' - i „  ."  .. •• ||,,,	, ij i . i in ,,,'i , ,',,,, • ,, , , |i»'..Mi!'11!.,.1" 'JtJh,1! n liJ I11 ,	illllllllllllimL'lllil'il Ii lllliilll	ii!i,> i!1'1"™1'", i,,!'1!: I'lCl.iittii',,',!, i,! ,'•!,„ 'i:,'!,U ,	/'J'JiyiiA»libllij JiiyilJi.il lililUl	"	HAM. iliHliiCnilMliiif |
 and applying TOT information as a delineation criterion.  Though  the application will be
 relatively complex (rated "M" in the matrix), the  panel  determined it to be within the
 State's capabilities and allotted time.
 Ease "of "Quantification.  Although" TOT is "more 'difficult	to quantify than" 'other" criteria,'
 the hypothetical  State's panel of experts believed that workable, technically  defensible
     ." I .        '  ! . I'll  •" ,   .' '  • ' - "•':	'• '  .;.. ' !:':l'./w.i';;*''i*:':'-	'"; ".I.'ViW:1	hiliiS'!i^                                      	
 thresholds  for the TOT criteria  can be established and applied.  These will focus on the          f
      j         •  i  Lull  i  ,   "-,  , •.  ,.   • rr :  i-x-; i!;":1-:."" :;:„'-, .'i.'-isii1	,;.iif.iitsu sir**MSIWIUMill•! ;>i	iii	'Lulu!1!11!	I, 'ni-'f:a,''li;u!:1iiaf:,f>fmgsi,'iamn	•miMrtw*
 need to protect wellheads from microbial and chemical  threats.  The panel concluded that
 a minimum of a  50-day TOT (along with a minimum distance of  500 feet) is needed to
 protect against  microbial contamination  (Zone n).   A  15-year  TOT  was seen  as  an
 appropriate threshold to protect the well  against the  threat of chemical contamination
 (Zone in).  Most water purveyors purchase the land immediately contiguous to the well,
 typically up to 100 feet away, which effectively delineates Zone I).                                 |
 Variability Under Prevailing  Conditions.    The panel recommended  that the  WHPA
 delineation effort should accommodate future changes in pumping patterns.   The panel
 concluded that selected criteria should allow adjustments to the size of the WHPA to
 allow for the effects of future increases in pumping rates; a TOT  criterion	will allow for
 this adjustment.  The projected maximum pumping  capacity of existing wells under some          _.
 drought conditions will therefore be factored  into the  analysis  to reduce the need to          *
 expand the WHPA's in the near future.
      .;            '!!'„  "'•••''', i'1""                       i   i i   i      i         j    i   11   i   i  i
 Ease of Field Verification.   It is not anticipated that field verification of zones of TOT's
 will be undertaken for the whole State.  Measurements will be done at several test case
 sites.    These measurements  will  be  extrapolated  to  other  WHPA's  with  similar
 hydrogeologic conditions in the State.                                                            1
 Ability to Reflect Ground-Water Standards. The panel recognized that the attentuation
 capacity of the aquifers for specific contaminants could theoretically be assessed.  The
 panel felt  this criterion  was impractical  to implement, except for some experimental
 studies. They also doubted that high-flow sand and sand and gravel aquifers  within the
 State could be protected by this criterion.
                                                                                       	I"  in111  *''
                                                                                       ii  MI'	i,
I

-------
 Suitability for Hydrogeologic Settings.  Use of a TOT criterion to delineate WHPA's in a
.water  table aquifer in porous  media was deemed  appropriate,  since  most  of  the
 approaches developed to estimate TOPs are based on assumptions that are generally met ..
 in these aquifers within the State.                                    •
 Ability  to Incorporate Physical Processes.  'Most  physical  processes  involved  in  the
 transport of contaminants in a porous media aquifer, such as advection and dispersion,  are
 incorporated in TOT. This criterion is thus quite applicable for this type of aquifer.
 5.2.3 Policy Considerations
                            •           •'.'''                   '                ,  .•
      The  hypothetical  State's panel also  evaluated the five criteria  with  respect to
 several policy considerations and a  composite ranking was established, as illustrated in
 Table 5-2.  For  these considerations, a  distance criterion was actually judged to be
 somewhat superior to TOT.  The panel's rationale for this ranking is discussed  below,  and
 the resolution of this issue provided in subsection 5.2.4.
 Ease of Understanding.  The ability of the general public to understand the criterion was
 considered important.  Distance was judged to be the easiest to understand ("H" rating on
 the matrix). However, it was believed that more technical concepts such as TOT could be
 explained to the public.
 Economy of Criteria Development.  Development of a  distance criterion would be very
 economical. However, the panel concluded that, were this criterion ultimately selected
 for the State, the threshold values selected should have some scientific basis.  It was also
 considered desirable to be somewhat "over-protective" (i.e., larger dimensions), given  the             ',
 problems  with  the  scientific  basis.   Implementation problems due  to extension of
 regulating authority over large geographic areas were a related concern.
 Defensibility.   The  panel  was concerned  by the lack of technical justification for  a
 distance criterion.  Since the  thresholds required to provide adequate protection would
 likely be  overly "conservative" (i,e., overprotected), challenges from affected  parties             *
 were considered possible.
 Usefulness for Implementing Phasing.  The panel  concluded that the distance criterion
 would be very useful for the State as  an  initial step if a phasing approach were to be used.
 In a few years the State could move  to  a more sophisticated criterion.  However, phasing   -
 had  already been  eliminated  to avoid enforcement problems  and the difficulties  of
 defending arbitrarily determined areas.                                                              I
                                          5-5

-------
    Q
   «§

es
.
-8
 O
   I

   "3

    p
   a.
   X
                                   CO
iiil   i
pll   §
GO
5
z
UJ
u.
Ill
o
             III
             oil
             K
             a

                                 i
                                 oc
                                 o.
                                                  Ul

                                                  5:
                                                        111
                                                 I

                                                 I

                                                 i
                                                 JB
                                                 J!

                                                 «•

                                                 1
                                                 Vt
                                                 •g
                                                              in


                                                              in
                                                        I
                                   5-6

-------
 Relevance to Protection Goal.  Given the hydrogeologic: settings in the State, and the
 other assumptions outlined above, most criteria were acceptable.  The key decision was
 believed to be the selection of criteria thresholds.
 5.2.* Summary of Panel's Decision on Criteria Selection
      The example for thie hypothetical State illustrated can various considerations affect
 the ultimate selection of criteria.  A TOT criterion was eventually chosen after weighing
 technical and policy considerations  together. Though policy issues might have led to the
 selection of distance as a  criterion, TOT was rated nearly as high. The deciding factors
 for this  State  were  the  concern over  legal  challenges,  the  relatively  "simple"
 hydrogeologic settings  (enhancing  the utility   of  TOT), and the fact that technical
 resources  in the State were  deemed adequate.  Therefore, the ultimate decision was to
 select "a TOT criterion as the basis for WHPA delineation.   The State established  a
 minimum of 15 years TOT as the threshold value.  Municipalities and counties were urged
 to adopt more protective thresholds (e.g., 20- to 50-year TOT's) where feasible.
 5.3  EXAMPLE OF METHOD SELECTION
      This section presents an example of how the panel of experts from the hypothetical
 State evaluated the choices of available methods for mapping WHPA's. Given the panel's
 previous recommendations on WHPA criteria, evaluations and rankings  were only made ifor
 methods that could  map a TOT criterion (Table  *-3).
                         1  .                        ,"'-'--          /
      The panel again assessed the choices with  respect to  both technical and  policy
 considerations.  The four methods that  would map the selected criterion (TOT) were
 evaluated with respect to technical evaluation  factors, described in subsection *.5.1. The
 results of their rankings are presented in Tables 5-3 and 5-4. As shown in these matrices,
 the panel preferred analytical flow and transport  models.  The technical  reason for this
 method preference  was based largely on the absence of flow boundaries near the pumping
 wells.  If the effects of boundaries on WHPA delineation had  been considered, the panel
 would have ranked  numerical flow/transport  models higher than the selected method.  An
 additional factor influencing the panel's ranking was the conclusions obtained by the State
, through comparative studies of WHPA delineations,  performed at a few selected  test
 sites.   These studies  indicated that the results from analytical flow/transport  models
 correlated well with results from the more  sophisticated methods  (such as numerical
 flow/transport models and hydrogeologic  mapping). Therefore, the less complex and more
 economical method was selected.
                                          5-7

-------
                           "5 S
                            §.2

                           ._ u
                           Si


                           i*
                           K n

                            ei
                                      I
5-8
                                      I

-------
       *

        0)
    O
    X
   ui

    0)
    .  5
       .§
     «*> IM
     §J
    w  §.

 w
 0)  M

31  I
-P*  o
     o>
        Si
        Z U •
        >H<
        §88
        ui e.
        «0
        e«
        £
               UI
             J" £

             D Z
             zui;
              o

             u.5
         "I
                         "I
                         ^^
                         HO
                         mui
                         ccX
                           o_
                           ui —
                           HO
                           <<
                           -ICC

                           §2
                           <5
                           Uu.
                                      m
  CO
  UJ

  I


O^
gui

Hoo

J<
£
o
o
O

O

00
OH
ocz

$*
  r^
  CC
  o

  %
-JZ
«
^o=w
EH j
Uj^UI
IU

L
LOW

IODE
                                                               •s §


                                                               Us
                                                               g S-D
                                                               — «R 

•; c in f C 18 • * S ff w , O t: l2=? t— H- «o -D •8 •8 in in o> c 1 m CC *. 5-9


-------
      From the csj^ndpoint of policy considerations, and in particular relevance to the
protection goal, analytical models were clearly preferred over numerical procedures. The
!***&* if used for all wells, would be prohibitively expensive and would prevent the State
from meeting its statutory responsibilities.
                                        5-10
                                                                                               2

-------
           ^                      REFERENCES
            v '"               •          '        •              •
    (.-.'•'         •/        ,                '      '        '\
Anderson,  M.P.  1984.   Movement of Contaminants in Groundwater:   Groundwater
     Transport—Advection and Dispersion.  .  Studies  in  Geophysics;   Groundwater
     Contamination. National Academy Press. Washington, D.C.
Anderson-Nichols & Co., Inc.  1985. Edgartown Water Resource Protection Program Final
     Report, Phase 3. Edgartown Board of Health.
Bear, 3.  1979.  Hydraulics of Groundwater. McGraw-Hill, Inc.
Bouwer, H. 1978. Groundwater Hydrology. McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Camp, Dresser, and McKee, Inc. 1986.  Town of Falmouth, Massachusetts, Water Supply
     Investigation, Zone of Contribution Study.  Report for Town of Falmouth Board of
     Public Works.  Boston, Massachusetts.
Camp, Dresser, and McKee,  Inc.   1983.  Wellfield  Travel Time Model for Selected
     Wellfields in Dade, Broward, and Palm Beach Counties, Florida. Prepared for Dade
     County  DERM, Broward County  Planning Council,  and Palm Beach County Area
     Planning Council.
Cartwright, K.   1987.   Personal  communication.   Illinois State Geological  Survey,
     Champaign, Illinois.
Conservation Foundation, The.  1987.  Groundwater Protection.  The Final Report of the
   ;  National Groundwater Policy Forum.  The  Conservation Foundation.  Washington,
     D.C.
Dade County  Planning Department.    1985.    Northwest  Wellfield  Protection  Plan.
     Department of Environmental Resources Management. Miami, Florida.
Dames & Moore.  1987.   Wellfield Protection Modeling Study,  Palm Beach  County,
     Florida. Report prepared for Palm Beach County, Board of County Commissioners.
DeHan, R.S.  1986.  New Approach to Protection of Sensitive Aquifers in Florida. Report
     to Florida Department of Environmental Regulations.
Dettan. 1987. Personal communication.
Desaulniers, D.E., 3.A. Cherry, and P.  Fritz.  1981. Origin, Age and Movement  of Pore
     Water in  Agrillaceous Quaternary Deposits in Southwestern Ontario.  3ournal of
     Hydrology. Vol. 50.  Pp. 231-257.
                                       R-l

-------
  Desaulniers, D.E., J.A. Cherry, and P. Fritz.  1981. Origin, Age and Movement of Pore
  _     Water in  Argillaceous Quaternary Deposits in Southwestern Ontario.  Journal of
       jH^djroJogjr, Vol. 50. Pp. 231-257.
  DeWiest, R.3.M. 1965. Geohydroloev.  3ohh Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  Driscpll,  F.G.   1986.  Groundwaterand W^lls.  Johnson Division.  St. Paul, Minnesota
       1089 p.

  Everett,  A.G.,  1987.  Some Significant Attributes  of  Aquifers as Related  to  Wellhead
       Protection Considerations.   Unpublished  Report  to /the  U.S.   Environmental
       Protection Agency, Office of Ground-Water Protection.
 Fetter, C.W.  1980.   Applied Hvdrogeolo^y.  Charles E.   Merill Publishing Company.
       Columbus, Ohio.
 Franks, B.3. (ed). 1987.  U.S. Geological Survey Program on Toxic Waste-Proceedings of
       the  Third Technical  Meeting,  Pensacola,  Florida,  March  23-27,  1987.   U.S.
       Geological Survey Open File Report S7-109.
 Freeze, R.A., and J.A.  Cherry.  1979. Groundwater.  Prentice Hall, Inc. 604 p.
 Fried, 3.3. 1975.  Groundwater Pollution.  Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company. New
      York, New York.
 Griffin,  R.A., and N.F.  Shimp.   1976.   Effect  of  pH  on Exchange-Adsorption  or
      Precipitation of  Lead  from Landfill  Leachates by  Clay Minerals.  Environment.
      Science and Technology.  Vol. 10.  Pp.  1256-1261.
 Griffin, R.A., et al. 1976. Attenuation of  Pollutants in Municipal Landfill Leachate  by
      Passage Through Clay*   Environment.  Science and  Technology.  Vol. 10.  Pp. 1262-
      1268.

Griffin, R.A., A.K. Au,  and Esk Chian.   1979.  Mobility  of Poly chlorinated Biphenyls and
      Dicambia in Soil  Materials:  Determination by Soil Thin-Layer Chromatography.
      Proceedings. 8th National Conference  and Exhibition  Municipal Sludge Management.
      Pp.183-189.

Heij,  B.3.   1987.   Personal  communication.   National  Institute of  Public Health and
      Environmental Hygiene, Bilthoven, The Netherlands.
Helling, C.S.  1971.  Pesticide Mobility in Soils III.  Influence of Soil Properties.   Soil
      Science Society of America 3ournal. Vol. 35. Pp. 743-747.
                                                                                             r
                                        R-2

-------
 HorsJey, Scptt W.  1983.  Delineating Zones of Contribution for Public Supply Wells to
   t  Protect Groundwater.   Proceedings of  the National  Water  Well  Conference.
      National Water Well Association. Worth ing ton, Ohio.
 Horsley, S.W., and T.C. Cambareri.  1984.  Delineating Zone of Contribution for Public
      Supply Wells to Protect Ground Water in New England. Journal NEWWA. pp. 19-43.
 Horsley, S.W., and  J.D.  Witten.   1986.  The  Town of Duxbury, Massachusetts Aquifer
      Protection Plan: A Case Study in Innovative" Water Quality Protection Strategies.
      Proceedings from the Third Annual  Eastern Regional Ground  Water Conference.
      National Water Well Association. Dublin, Ohio.
 iwata,  Y.,  W.E.,  Westlake,  and  F.A. Gunther.    1973.    Varying  Persistence  of
      Polychlorinated Biphenyls in Six California Soils Under Laboratory  Conditions.
      Bulletin of Environmental Contamination Toxicology.  Vol. 9.  Pp. 204-211.
 Keely, J.R.,  and Tsang,  C-F.Y.  1983.  Velocity  Plots and  Capture Zones of  Pumping
      Centers for Ground-Water Investigations. Ground Water. Vol. 21.  No. 6.  Pp. 701-
      714.
Keswick, B.H., and C.P. Gerba. 1980.  Viruses in Groundwater.  Environmental Science and
      Technology. Vol.14.  Pp. 1290-1297.
Kinniburgh, D.G.,  M.L. Jackson,  and J.K. Sykes.  1976.  Adsorption of Alkaline  Earth,
      Transition, and Heavy Metal Cations by Hydrous Oxide Gels of Iron and Aluminium.
      Soil Science Society of America Journal.  Vol. 40. Pp. 796-799.
Lattman, L.A., and R.R. Parizek.  1964.  Relationship Between Fracture Traces and the
      Occurrence of Ground Water in Carbonate Rocks.  Journal Hydrology.  Vol.2.  Pp.
      73-91.
Matthess, G.  1987.  Personal communication. Institute of Geology and Paleontology, Kiel
      University, Kiel, West Germany.
Matthess, G., and A. Pekdeger. 1981.  Survival and Transport of Pathogenic Bacteria and
      Viruses in Ground Water.  Geological-PaleOntological Institute  of  Kiel University,
      Kiel,  Federal Republic of Germany.
Matthess,  G.,  S.S.D.  Foster, and  A.C.  Skinner.    1985.   Theoretical  Background,
      Hydrogeology  and  Practice  of Groundwater  Protection Zones.   International
                                        R-3

-------
       Contributions to Hydrogeologv.  Vol.6.  UNESCO-IUGS.  International Association
       of Hydrogeologists, Heise, Hannover, West Germany.
 Matthess, G., et al.  1985.   Der Stofftransport im  Grundwasser und die Wasserschutz-
       geibietsrichtlinie W101.   Umweltbundesamtes.   Berichte 7/85,  Erich  Schmidt,
       Verlag, Berlin, West Germany.
 McDonald, M.G.,  and A.W. Harbaugh.   1984.   A Modular Three-Dimesional  Finite-
       Difference Ground-Water Flow Model.  USGS Open File Report 83-875.
    ,;: i . | '    '     j, "i; i   „     „ i' , " ";;!n j. •  i  ;, |	, i,, ^ • ' ,;  '	|	|	nil"                     |
 Meade, D.B., and  R.3. Knowlton.   1985.  Ground-Water Availability in Southeastern         I
       Connecticut,  Cannondale Aquifer, Wilton Falls Pond Aquifer, Redding.  Connecticut
       Water Resources Bulletin No. 33C.
 Milanovic, P.T. 1981. Karst Hvdrogeology. Water Resources Publications. 434 p.
 Milde, G., K. Milde, P. Friesel, and M. Kiper. 1983.  Basis and New Development of the
      Groundwater  Quality Protection  Concepts in  Central  Europe.   Report from the         i
      International  Conference on Groundwater and Man; Volume 2, Groundwater and the         '
      Environment.  Australian Government Publishing Service.
 Morrissey, D.3. 1987.  Estimation of the Recharge  Area Contributing Water to a Pumped
      Well in a Giadal-Drift, River-Valley Aquifer.   U.S. Geological Sunrey Openipile
      Report 86-543.	'	.,    '	
 National  Water  Well  Association.   1985.  The Survey  Says:  Average Ground Water         I
      Scientist Salary tops $32,500.  The Newsletter of the Aissociation of Ground Water
      Scientists and Engineers.  Vol. 1. No. 6.
Neuman, S.P., and  P.A. Witherspoon. 1969.  Applicability of Current Theories of Flow in
      leaky Aquifers.  Water Resources Research. Vol." 5.'	Pp. 8T7-829	'  ' '	'	'	'''''	"" -"	'"'	'	'	'	''"'
Office of Ground-Water Protection, U.S. Environmental Protectipn Agency.  1986.  Final
      Draft Guidelines for  Ground-Water  Classification  under  the EPA  Ground-Water
      Protection Strategy.  Washington, D.C.
     •" !,           '" „" I   	   i'  : , :• ' '    n "  l!*1 |i M! »!»•." .„'! ' ii ' „ "',11, i '. '.y.,,,11'! "I,," il* "|!":i|.| < m'! A'l|||, i..!i!i	Pi, I ,""l, i* A :l, ^ ' ,. i'1 ! ,i ' in	'"i,,, *	 'iHI! ,'! ,'H ''.,, , i1, || n ,.|i,'i, '.''f	,', |il|i , "; WMi 'Hpill I i, 'll!|	
-------
Office of  Ground-Water  Protection,  U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency.   1987.
           >;..'•       -    •-'•'•     . • '   •- -             ,  • • •    • • ,
     Geophysical Techniques  for  Aquifer and Wellhead  Protection  Area Delineation.
 •     > -        •        •      -'•       •,'"                    •      '
  ** (unpublished draft report).           ..
             •                          .                     •
Office of  Ground-Water  Protection,  U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency.   1987.
     Workshop on  Guidance  for  the Wellhead  Protection  and Sole  Source Aquifer
     Demonstration Programs: Hydrogeologic Criteria.
                   ,           "               '             .                - - '
Office of Research and Development.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. ,1987.
     Proposed  Criteria .for Selection of Ground Water  Exposure  Assessment Models.
     (draft report). OHEA-E-219.
Pennsylvania, Commonwealth  of. 1985. Proposal for the  Management of Ground-Water
     Quality in Pennsylvania.  Division of Water  Quality,  Bureau  of  Water Quality
     Management, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.
Prickett, T.A., T.G.   Naymik, and C.G. Lonnguist.   1981.  A "Random Walk" Solute
     Transport Model for Selected Groundwater Quality Evaluations. Illinois State Water
     Survey Bulletin 65. ^
Quinlan,  3.F.,  and  R.O. Ewers.   1985.  Ground Water  Flow in Limestone  Terranes:
     Strategy  Rationale and  Procedure for Reliable, Efficient  Monitoring of  Ground
     Water Quality in Karst Areas.  National  Symposium and  Exposition on Aquifer
     Restoration and  Ground Water  Monitoring.   National  Water  Well Association.
     Worthington, Ohio.
Rodon,  R.    1984.    Dade  County's Regulatory  Approach  to Wellfield  Protection.
     Metropolitan Dade County Environmental Resource Management,  Miami, Florida.
Russell, A.D., and G.M. Thompson.   1983.  Mechanisms Leading to Enrichment of the
     Atmospheric Fluorocarbons CC13F and CC12F  in Groundwater.   Water  Resources
     Research. Vol. 16. Pp. 1*5-158.
Solley, W.B., E.B. Chase, and W.B. Mann IV.  1983. Estimated Use of Water in the United
     States in 1980. Geological Survey Circular 1001. U.S. Department of the Interior.
Southern Water Authority  (England).   1985.  Aquifer Protection Policy, 1985. Guildborne
     House, Worthing, West Sussex, England.
Strahler, A.N.  1966. A Geologist's View of Cape Cod. Natural History Press.
                                        R-5

-------
 Theis, C.V.  1935.  The Relation Between the Lowering of the Pieziometric Surface and
       thttiRate  and Duration  of  Discharge of  a Well  Using  Ground-Water Storage.
v      American Geophysical Union Transactions.  Vol. 16.  Pp. 519-524.
 Thompson, G.M., and 3.M. Hayes.  1979.  Trichlorofluoroe thane  in  Ground Water—A
       Possible Tracer and Indicator of Ground Water Age.  Water Resources Research.
       Vo.5.  Pp. 546-554.                                                     ,
 Todd, O.K. 1980. Ground Water Hydrology.  John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
 Tomson, et al.  1987.  Facilitated Transport.   Presentations to  Research Seminar, R.S.
       Kerr Environmental Research Laboratory and National Center for Ground-Water
       Research, Oklahoma City.
 U.S. Geological Survey.  1984.  National Water Summary 1984,.  Water-Supply Paper 2275.
       Reston, Virginia.
 van der Heijde, P.K.M., and M.S. Beljin.  1987.  Model Assessment for Wellhead Protection
       Area Delineation (in  press).  Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
       Office  of Ground-Water  Policy.    Holcomb Research  Institute,  Water Science
       Program, Butler University, Indianapolis, Indiana.
 Van Waegeningh, HlE., 1985.  Protection of Ground-Water Quality.  Pp. 111=121 and 159-
       166.  in Matthes,  G.  et.  al., editors.  Theoretical Background. Hydrogeology and
       Practice  of  Groundwater  Protection   Zones.    International  Association  of
       Hydrogeologists,  International  Contributions in Hydrogeology,  Vol. 6.    Heise
       (publisher), Hannover, West Germany.
 Van Waegeningh, H.G.  1985. Protection of Ground-Water Quality,  pp.  111-121 and 159-
       166. in Matthess, et al., 1985 (above).
 Van Waegeningh, H.G. 1986. Borderlands of Ground-Water Protection Zones.  Proceedings
                  ''                '   '    '                        1  '
                 ,  .  .      ,        ,        ,     .      .   •  ....   .        .     ..
      of the 19th Congress of the International Association of Hydrogeologists. Karlovy
      Vary, Czechoslovakia. Stavebni Geologic, Prague.

 Van Waegeningh, H.G., 1987.  Personal communication.  National Institute of  Public
      Health and Environmental Hygiene, Bilthoven, The Netherlands.
                             '"' " ,! ;'  ;",  i '„! ":•[.'.            _  ..... I
 Vermont  Department of Water  Resources.  1985.  Vermont Aquifer Protection Area
      Reference Document.
                                                                                   !'!!«','i I1,;*«! if I'M'' hii^'fr
                                        R-6


-------
Vorhees, M.L.  1985.  User's Reference Guide for an Interactive Solute Transport Model.
     Lake Wales, Florida.
       •.%>-.      .               '                   ••-.'•'-.
Walton, W.C.   1970.  Groundwater Resource Evaluation.  McGraw-Hill Book Co., New
     York.
Walton, W.C.  1984.  Practical Aspects of Ground Water Modeling.  National Water Well
     Association.  Worthington, Ohio.
Yates, M.V., C.P. Gerba, and L.M.  Kelley.  1985.  Virus Persistence in Groundwater.
     Applied and Envirommental Microbiology. Vol. 49. No. 4.
      ;                                     ^                                     '
Yates, M.V., S.R. Yates, A.W. Warrick, and C.P. Gerba.  1986. Predicting Virus Fate to
     Determine Septic Tank  Setback  Distances Using Geostatistics. Report by  Robert
     S. Kerr Environmental Research Lab, Ada, Oklahoma.
                                       R-7

-------
.»,;  ; '•  v .j -»:,;;:]"'}: ?	jjpj1"!' ,7; fFfi'JFf •'•','' ';l '-|""!"'"''l"!	!'••'! S'fJ" ;T' •' 2?'f'tl'

-------
           • V -;  •                   APPENDIX A
            ^  •••.;-:•     -    .  ..  .   -.         .    •  ;.,       ,-                    -   "
                         WHPA DELINEATION APPROACHES

      There are many examples of wellhead protection programs in the United States and
Europe.    The  structure  and  scope  of  these programs  vary and reflect  differing
demographic, political, and hydrogeologic conditions.  Some states and municipalities have
developed  wellhead protection as part of overall ground-water protection programs.  The
main focus of these programs is the delineation* of wellhead protection areas that impose
land use controls to protect public water supply wells.                                              [
A.1   STATE EXAMPLES
      As part of EPA's research on wellhead protection, numerous state programs  were
             . ' • "  i           •        "• .   • •    '"..'•'              ' •     "                  V'
examined for technical aspects of their WHPA delineation effort.  Six common methods
for WHPA delineation were identified, as  well as  many specific techniques for applying
them to local situations. These methods are listed together with associated criteria and            1
locations where they are applied.
      The methods identified in Table A-l  range in sophistication from those that can be
applied by  non-technical professionals  (e.g., arbitrary fixed  radius) to  very complex
methods that require technical specialists (e.gn numerical  flow/transport models).  The
following is a brief review of wellhead protection activities in four selected states. While
not exhaustive, this review gives an indication of existing State and local programs.                   [
A.1.1 State of Florida
      Several of Florida's County governments have sophisticated ground-water protection
programs.   The  State  has  also passed amendments to Chapter 17-3 of the Florida
Administrative Code  that establishes  a  State-wide wellhead protection program for
vulnerable  aquifers.  The program would  require wellhead protection zones to restrict            I
activities that could contaminate the ground water.
      The  proposed law establishes  two protection zones around public drinking water
supplies that have  an average daily withdrawal of  at least  100,000 gallons  of ground
water.  The zones are defined as two  concentric  areas around  the major public water
supply well(s)  or well field(s)  of  200 feet and  5 years ground-water  travel  time,
respectively. The 5-year TOT zone is defined with an analytical volumetric equation, a            I
concept explained in Section 4 and Appendix B.                      \
                                        A-l '"             •
                                                        •'        -                           '    I

-------
         *        "    •"  '       -            TABLE A-l	,
         •Y-          ..           •    •  '    •:   ,   "   ;.	.•	.";:	,	•	•	!	,	•	r	:	!	••
t                     State WHPA Delineation  Methodologies and Criteria







     *               ""                 "        '   '           ';    ' ' .'"            ,  i       "  ' '    ,
    ,;. •'  .             '!i         ,        :• .    I,", 	 :   .' .'•';' .•,".!' Jiiill  ,-i V ''" (IS Sill1'*	I'1'!:-"—I.1 rlf.S.	"!'! V,,.,,' ;M*;ii1,1r',. .'>,!'..', ' ;•-• •''•-'] ..'li.iiTij*:.:::1:,1 'ai"1.'* •.•»!'!	K
                  ••..!!  ""          , •'    ,    I1.,'1' ' . !	!   •• i.  \;	 -	".'V't-kit :S ;iil»;:l«l	VI :	' •••,.'.:tl( •''':'..*,'i1.1*.1': 7	.:, ,
  ,   •        	      <	if •    .     •,    .   ..   ., .. I' ':: •;,' .';'•...,,. •' ••••;,, (.;: • £. i % y Hifiiiffiipi: i1 >,;;; •,-.',;, /;. •}>.?- ^; ::•;.• .;• ;>"'. \', •",. "^	Ill W.1K I
                     »' i    '        .   '    "•''!, i. • i»  " 'i  ' « i' " "'"" •' i ir.1	r,,'  'i.i,,:i',,,' ' "•* !.IH> li	l/!"«l!l!,:,1 , ,,,tin:.'i ,! •, i "« m'f '	 ^,1 i»!	n M1 V/ , j"1'1" •• "^n'l"!	i"i,,jwii uWt ifi 1';,,,llilil!llPilln!ll,!J I'llP
     11 i          •' • •;••«;  ,      ' • '•  . •  ; •='.;, , K;,•.:•••::  •. ^'.•.•>:•"•.'w:	i'^Selected
                                    Criteria                    Locations
 Method                           ReUed on                   Where Used*

 Arbitrary Fixed Radius            Distance                   Nebraska
    :_,"          "     :I          ,   '','    .,                     	Fh>rida     '^'J_[	^	', |
                   .  ;      '•'.''.,''.    '           	Edgartown, MA	
                                                                Duxbury,  MA

 Calculated Fixed Radius           Distance:                   Florida                                  •
                                    Time of Travel                                                       [

 Simplified Variable Shapes         Time of Travel              Southern England
                                    Drawdown
 Analytical Flow Model
 Geologic/Geomorphic
Numerical Flow/Transport
Model
Drawdown
Physical Features
Physical Features
Time of Travel
Drawdown
Cape Cod, MA
Duxbury, MA
Edgartown, MA
West Germany
Holland
Vermont
Connecticut
Duxbury, MA

Dade Co., FL
Broward Co., FL
Palm Beach, FL
  or being considered
                                            A-2
                                                             !, ,	'M:' iiliED	!'-	I jl'l i.', 'h.

                                                                                                           (Ill
                                                                                                     milt
                                                                                                         i

-------
      Within^these concentric zones, discharges into the ground-water from stormwater
 systems, underground storage facilities, underground product pipelines, and other sources
   «*,';•      .               '         •  .         .      •    ,             '
 are subject to varying degrees of control depending on their proximity to the wellhead.             r
 For example, the proposed law prohibits new .discharges and new installations within the
 200-foot zone of protection.  Within the 5-year zone of protection, new discharges from,
 several types of  facilities are subject to control and  monitoring  requirements.   New
 discharges of industrial wastes that contain hazardous constituents are prohibited and new
 discharges of treated domestic waste  effluents  are  allowed,  provided a number  of
 conditions are met.                                                                               F
 A.1.2  Dade County, Florida
      Dade  County  has  developed a  comprehensive   wellhead  protection   program,
 consisting of  five elements: water management, water and wastewater treatment, land
 use  policy,  environmental  regulations  and enforcement,  and public  awareness and
 involvement.   The  program applies to an  array  of prohibitions,  restrictions, permit            .
 requirements, land use tools, and management controls  designed to protect all of Dade            t
 County's  public  water  supply  wells from  contamination  by the  approximately 900
 substances which the County  has identified as hazardous.   Features  of the program
 include:
  '   •    Delineation of recharge areas around  wellfields  using  numerical  computer
           models   with  some  in-field  verification  through  monitoring  of  head            F
           relationships
     •    Application of  land-use  restrictions  within the  recharge  areas  and  the
           designated wellfield protection zones
     •    Public education programs
     •    Establishment of water treatment programs                                             3
     •    Development of water management and pollutant source control regulation.
     Where the State  of Florida defines two concentric  protection zones, Dade County
establishes three.  The inner two are delineated as 30- and 210-day TOT's.  The outermost
zone is the larger of either a 500-day TOT  or a 1-foot drawdown.  The largest WHPA,
approximately 7 miles across, is associated  with the Northwest Wellfield.
I
                                        A-3
                                        .-''••       ' '       -•               '    '    '.'   •    ''I

-------
      Furthermore, Dade County maintains a computerized  inventory  of contaminant
^sources, and issues  approximately  10,000 operating permits;  per year  to  recognized,
nonresidential users within the delineated wellfield protection zones:
A.1.3 Massachusetts
      The Commonwealth of Massachusetts does not require extensive WHP (except for
micrpbial threats), but does incorporate the concept as an option, and fosters it through
the Aquifer Land Acquisition Program (ALA). The goals of th« program are to help local
officials define the primary water recharge' areas around public water supply wells, to
work with local officials to properly address land uses within the recharge areas of these          *
wells, and to reimburse eligible applicants for land acquired  in key segments of recharge
areas for water supply protection purposes.  The program encourages a mix of strategic
land acquisition and effective land use controls to achieve water well protection.
      As part of the program, the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Quality
Engineering (DEQE)  has defined  three  zones of contribution that  compose the total          I
recharge  areas for  a public  well.   Theoretically  these  three  zones constitute  the
geographic area in which land uses may affect the drinking water supply well.
     •     Zone  1, the 400-foot  radius or other designated  area surrounding a  water
           supply well, must be in compliance with the DEQE Drinking Water Regulation
           (310 CMR 22.00).
     •     Zone II is the area of an aquifer that  contributes  water to a well under the
           most  severe  recharge  and  pumping  conditions  that can  be  realistically
           anticipated.   It  is  bounded  by the ground-water divides that result from
           pumping the well, and by the edge of the aquifer with jess permeable materials
           such as  till and bedrock.   At some locations, streams and lakes may form
           recharge boundaries.
          Zone III is that land area beyond the area of Zone II from which surface water
                   ::    ,     . • ••  "'   '.• •  ,: [•• /',,    " " "           III      I         I       I   i
          and ground water drain into Zone II. The surface drainage area as determined
                   ";.        ",   '    ...'•   '•' i1:.  •'..'..
          by topography is commonly coincident with the ground-water drainage area
                   i          • •,'  i   '•  i. -i.". i •',•;',,  	                         t             j
          and will be used to delineate Zone HI.  In  some locations, where surface and
          ground-water drainage are not coincident, Zone III shall consist of both the
                                        I. ..  , .    • . >    ,,:',! ,v.  ,, ,.-' • , . •!.• .i  ,  . •  i ...  ••	 • , .1  |i' ... ••, •,„•„ „•!•.•.• .-,ii.-,,,i, M>
          surface drainage and the ground-water drainage areas.                                  |
                                                                                              V.
                                                               	•!:,!•  11 I, ' ,„•''! ! !• •, ',V» i! • '	 /I-, i?'. "...''li/1 ., J.-.'•'•,,,l,''v. !'" .'.i'!1'11:'':!», !#•',!	Jui! mill, u '"'!', • t!}! i ,:!:i! ft iJI

-------
      The delineation and management of these three zones form the basis of an  ALA
 grant program^through which local governments compete to obtain funds from the State
 to purchase land for water well protection purposes.
      The Commonwealth has restricted the reimbursement for land purchases to Zone II.        '     '
 The rationale for this decision  was that Zone II areas consist of relatively permeable
 surficial deposits and represent the area of the municipality in which land uses have the
 greatest potential for adversely impacting the local water wells(s). Zone I was eliminated
 from the reimbursement scheme because under Massachusetts law the water supplier is
 already required to control  land use within the'400-foot radius surrounding the well.  It             r
 should  be  noted, however, that land purchase is used primarily as an incentive to foster
 participation in the program. Even with some of the small glacial aquifers in the State, a
 minor portion of the land in the recharge area can be purchased.  The key protection is
 afforded by the adoption of  ordinances, which the State requires for acceptance of ALA           *
 grants.
      The  program requires  applicants to supply four major categories of information:             I
 aquifer/water supply information,  land use  information, resource protection plans, and
 land acquisition  information.   Under the first category, Zones  I, II, and  III must be
 delineated and mapped.  Any pump tests or modeling used to delineate  zones must be
 documented.

      Some level of land use information must be supplied for all three zones.  All major
 land, use activities such as commercial,  residential, agricultural,  and industrial uses  in              E
 Zone II must be mapped and  public transportation corridors identified.  For areas in Zone
 III, only those land use  activities that pose significant threats to ground water—such as
hazardous  waste  sites, surface  impoundments, landfills,  auto junkyards,  underground
storage tanks, salt storage sheds, and sand and gravel operations—need be documented.
       11                    >             ,                 ..'.,'.
     Information on a water resources protection strategy that identifies existing and/or              3
proposed land use  controls designed to  protect the  supplies must be included in the
submittal  for the suggested land  and/or easement .purchase.   The  State  uses  this
information to determine whether there is a sound basis for the locality acquiring the land
and whether the town will indeed be able to complete the land acquisition should an award
be granted.
                                        A-5

                                                                                                 1

-------
      All applications are ranked and prioritized based on two major criteria:  the value
and use df'the resource and the degree of resource protection thai can be ^xp^^ |,.om
%ws proposed water protection strategy. ••                         .
A.1.4  Vermont	            "          .•	^   	"	  .;      '.       ,s
      The State of ..Vermont is  developing  a Statewide wellhead protection program. As
part of this, the Agency  for Environmental Conservation (AEC) is developing regulations
that will be used to  map the  cones of influence, the primary  recharge areas, and the
     ",      i  .  ,,' ' -if • j   .:	,. •'i1 .;,;.'•';w'.r""<;\ n  i i  i 	«  i	
secondary recharge areas of water wells in  Vermont. These maps will be used by AEC and
other regulatory agencies in their permitting activities.                                          f
      One set  of  tools currently  available  to  State  regulatory  agencies  making
management  decisions are the existing maps of recharge  areas or  Aquifer Protection
Areas that were delineated in the Vermont Aquifer Protection Area (APA) Project in the
1970's.  The project resulted in 209 individual APA's  located in 10* Vermont towns. An
APA is defined as the  land surface area  that encompasses; the recharge, collection,          _
transmission, and storage zones for a town's well or spring.                                       i
      Eight categories of APA's were delineated based  on hydrogeologic factors:
      *    Wells in  unconfinedand leaky  unconsolidatedaquifers  with   available
     „            , 	     ,    " J  :  S  l"« , ' ' I' ,  ,  ,' 	| '"', ,  ,„ • ,  ', i'	i 'in1;']:, •., I .•!,'!'': i1' • 1 • ]," \\f 11} ,1'ijr' ii,Sf 'i||n|i I,,,, „, i •» | i', i; Tiln , ,|;,,, • , i'»„ i ,|,:	, m, ,'' . ,i '	; :;,•;! , ,,,.,„• |i, •• ]• •	; • ',  - »,]];-;;»,;,- >,';.;;;;]], ;:;|]
           engineering pump tests
      •    Wells in  unconfined and leaky unconsolidated ac[uifers without engineering
           pump tests             	  ;	
      •    Wells in confined unconsolidated aquifers
                  "'::| 'il '      "l'1  ", ':'  ', •'.,! '' ' ' '                       I . II I  I  I -I
      •    Bedrock1 wells, using an infiltration model
      •    Bedrock wells, using a  leakage model
      •    Springs   in   unconsolidated   material  and   at   the  interface   between         |
           unconsolidated material and  bedrock,  with  high  relief  in  the upgradient
                	'"' i1    '  ,.     ' • ,  •' "',''' ii  ; ""',.', -I , i »          in  i| n i  i     n       I    i   IN     fi 11   i in
           direction
      •    Springs   in   unconsolidated   material  and   at   the   interface   between
           unconsolidated material and  bedrock, with  low  relief  in  the  upgradient
           direction                                                                           •
                                                                                               1
      •   Springs emanating from bedrock.
                                          A-6
                                                                                                1

-------
 There are no .regulations associated with mapped APA's, but Vermont's existing regulatory _
 programs use WPA's to flag areas needing special consideration during the review process
 on development applications.                                         .
 A.2  EUROPEAN DELINEATION APPROACHES
      At least 11 European  countries have developed ground-water protection programs
 comparable to the WHPA concept (Figure A-l). The European Community (EC) Directive
, on the  Protection  of  Groundwater  Against Pollution  Caused  by Certain Dangerous
 Substances (80/63/EC), issued in December 1979# requires member states to protect (by
 law,  regulation, and administrative provision) all usable ground waters against direct/and              [
 indirect  discharges of  certain  listed  substances..   However, ground-water protection
 programs in Europe significantly predate  this directive.   Development of  policies to
          1                              ', "                  ~ '     '* .                '          '
 prevent  movement of contaminants into the subsurface environment began in the  last
 century,  through  the most  important laws and regulations date to the  1950's,  West
 Germany and the Netherlands have the mo$t extensive experience in this area, and their
 programs are described here.           .                                                            [
      European programs generally  involve  the delineation  of  at least three zones of
 protection, defined by  distance and/or TOT.  These are more or less concentric rings,
 starting  with the area immediately around the wellhead.  Typically, an outermost zone is
 drawn to the recharge area boundary.   Within these zones, restrictions are imposed on a
 number of activities including, but not limited to do, waste  disposal sites, the transport
 and storage of  hazardous chemicals,  waste water  disposal,  and  the  application  of             •
 teachable pesticides.   The degree  of  restriction  decreases as  the distance  from  the
 wellhead increases.
 A.2.1 The Netherlands
      The Netherlands delineates three or more zones of protection, based on aquifer type
(van Waegeningh,  1985 and 1987).  These zones are generally defined using analytical              *
 models whose applications require some degree of  technical expertise. When the effort     '
began, simple fixed-radius approaches were used.  Analytical methods are now the most
widespread  approach.  Numerical models  for WHPA assessment around key  wells  are
increasingly common, though analytical methods are still used for  the areas closest to  the
pumping wells (Heij,  1987).   The  first protective  area lies immediately  around  the
wellhead, up to 30 meters away, and is purchased by the water authority.  The second              I
zone  is defined by a 60-day TOT, and is  designed to protecj the well from microbial
                                        A-7

-------
f ' ' " -•' 	 ' ' 	 ' ' "

,
Ifr
4




i»





V)
D
£!
^J

C
•7 O
i •«
< 1
||
M*
fr* g
O
o
a
S
9
Ul




















a
•e
I

1

cs

i
•

b
1
1
Switxerll
B
M
m
o
0
u
N

2

Ketherlcndi

|
*e
**

*


i

b

I

Q,
*
•g
k*
e
b
CD

«
11
-1 '


•* <•
*•* «
rs

e M
*< *" B
U B »>
IN s
• .
I »
b S B 5 •
BUB g
i £ B g S
•• e
b A A
§
it i
i" g'
a.

"" e
• N
m
SrllT
•5 "e £ S
"b a o ""
*" * 0. C
N
{Mediate
protection
(10 - 2CMO

I .H

Hlli

M B B b
&

§
|g£
"I"
—
Is !•
•< • A 1

V
JC •
B B
•rf b
C B
~
§H
b
B 3 B »
— u e CM

*2 i S
I £
b *• B B
IP I
0.

§ 1.
u — e *>
e ** a ««B

III §e
e SS
e
o *
u v v
B b
|« g
a.


S "
Ss
""*"*"
0 ~ O
ta k ••





— B
• BM
^P
I g


^
•M b
is


= E
Is
M
B
O
b *• B

Ifs

8s & =
sitls §S 15
•S e B £ oo
S.-S w B IB -3 E
Bee b •••>
B b Ml B BO
-a «, « «:b
<
7s
e m
M
a
M
= <
B Ul
1 5
Ul
"m m b-S if
e *e B *< B K
b e *> u e
** g g ^ " ^
M B B b X
* O
Ul
** ** B £1
SUB "•
B b r\
B *> B O
'"£ >

irf
B °=
i.JT J •<
-» « «l f B U
•< V U B
U • B b 59
2 8 J! fa " ~
e b w b 3
£ * ^ 5 o
§
ttl • tt
II- H
a =)
O
si.

JU B
B b
r
§
2tis
•* B b
*" O * '


<
-
"5
r





m
••
7
~ e
pa



































in
g
*
C
c

s
s
lii
u
c •
3
,8
A-8

-------
 contaminants. There is then a >ater protection" area, roughly comparable to the WHPA
 boundaries. This is subdivided into areas within 10-year and 25-year TOT, roughly 800 and
 1,200  meters from the well in the Netherlands.  An outermost zone, the "far  recharge
 area," is delineated to the outer boundary of the well recharge area.
 A^2  West Germany                     ' •                         ,
     The West  German  wellhead protection strategy, though it was developed first, is
 quite comparable to the Dutch approach, and also depends largely on analytical solutions.
 Zone I covers the immediate wellhead area, to a radius  of 10 to 100 meters. Zone II is
 delineated by a 50-day TOT.   The "water protection area,"  Zone III, is subdivided into
 inner and outer areas.  Zone, m A extends up to 2 kilometers  from the well (if the aquifer
 boundaries are more distant).  Zone HI B extends to the  outer boundary of the recharge
area.   Since many aquifers  are contained within sedimentary  basins, hydrogeologic
mapping and numerical simulation procedures are used in a basin-by-basin approach.
                                                                                                I
                                       A-9

-------
I

\
a

-------
                                     APPENDIX B                                            A
        '    ' V   a               J                '      '            •.',..     '
             ^        .      COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS
    ' •*'  '    '      •       .               '  •         •              '      '       •''.'•'•..
       Comparative analyses of WHPA methods were presented in Chapter ft as a valuable             I
 approach for State wellhead protection. This appendix provides examples of comparative
 analyses of method applications for wells in Massachusetts,  southern Florida, Colorado,
 and Connecticut.  Each comparative analysis focused on an existing or proposed well or            .
= well field.  The sites chosen all had some WHPA delineation already in place or in process.
 The State, county, or locality that performed WHPA delineation utilized the method of its
 choice. Criteria and criteria thresholds varied, depending on  specific program goals.  To             i
 complete these analyses as method comparisons,  additional approaches Were applied.  The
 four basic methods used were:               .
      •     Calculated fixed radius (CFR), based on the State of Florida's approach
      •     Analytical methods
                 Uniform flow model                                                              1
                                                u                 '                  .    •     ,
                 Strahler prism model
      •     Numerical model.
      The comparative analyses present examples of delineation method selections as they
 might  be  encountered  in  "real world"  situations.  The analyses compared WHPA's
                 •  •   •           '  '      '  •  N'          '  '         '        •  '           •  '        f
 delineated  by  different methods  for a single well  or  well field  and  one set  of             *
 hydrogeologic  parameters.   Direct comparison  of areas resulting from each of  these
 methods should be made with  a understanding that  the areas  being compared  may
 represent different types of zones.   For example,  as discussed in Chapter 4, the  area
 resulting from applying the uniform flow model is the zone  of contribution of the well,
 whereas areas resulting from application of numerical models (particularly as presented in             _
 this appendix) yield zones of influence or zones of transport. These comparisons are based             *
 on the assumption that the numerical model yields the most "accurate" delineations of
 WHPA's.  Therefore, comparisons use the WHPA  resulting from the numerical methods as
 the standard.                                               ,
      In each case study, different delineation methods were used for individual well(s)
 using the same or very similar hydrogeologic parameters. The  delineation methods used in             I
 the comparative analysis and the type of data  required by  each method  are shown in
                                         B-l


-------
\
' Its* " -' ' • ' ' -
• ^ -'-..'. ; •'.''•••• : ' '









w»
•o
0
_c *•

"<5*£ c
5 £ 1
 > o
80 i- "*§
S? *•*• 6
' S <* a
s> «t c
uZ a> o
E u
0)
,• .— .—
^
cr-o
G> 0)
tt "
3
(A
L. .S
fl
o


a s
a».2
||
•o §
>» o
I CD




06

e


•' x'
-
c

O

H
^£
5

"o
o

,u •£

i

t

•
•'• x. , • - ••-•-,.'
^ 18 S 8
^ . a> o> •  ' "55
"jj-t-SSS .
I £ Sr fr E E E ^
o _j_i_J:D:5-J:5-'-J— '— i



'-•'/


UJ
DC
XX 3 . - '
'••'*" • •
-1 ' » ». ^,
Pa^ Q) CD •« ?™ C
"g c E "2 ' *" c8-5« ojE^ ^^ol
X p O ' HI ,U *« o ^3 fj « *^ j> B
teri ff- i/j C i& ^^ «^ 2* ^» •"• Q) 2 O3 • f*r»
O •*« C . . 2 ScC^T^^JOcnSCg1
• S = ^ 8 ' -'i 1 lll'l I ! i-SiS'l-
«. E fe .H < >- 2 5 o >- ^ 2 .2 »
3 v> O V Q- -^ H CL Q. X CO CO O OC
y — *tj BJ E
fl) "2 'C £ 3
U S ,3 v) Z' • '

' \ ' ' • -
                                                       I
                                                        I
B-3

-------
  B.1  CAPE COD, MASSACHUSETTS
  B.1.1 Hydrogeology of Study Area                                                ..
       "The principal water-bearing formations on Cape Cod, predominantly unconsolidated         1
  sands and gravels, are parts of a coastal complex of end moraines and outwash plains.  The
  study area's major geologic formations include the Mashpee pitted outwash plain deposits,
  the Buzzards Bay moraine deposits, and the Buzzards Bay outwash deposits. The majority
  of the study area is situated over the Mashpee pitted outwash plain.  The surf icial outwash
  deposits are composed of fluvially-bedded gravels and gravelly sands deposited following
  recession of the Cape Cod Bay and Buzzards Bay lobes. At depth, silty sands and till have         F
 also been identified. Recharge to the ground-water system is provided primarily through
 precipitation during the winter and  spring seasons. Typicallyj the study area averages 43
 inches of precipitation annually, with reported estimates of annual recharge  to  the
 ground-water system between 12  and 24 inches.  Remaining precipitation is lost through
 evapotranspirationj a small portion  is lost through direct runoff to streams, ponds,  and
 swamps.                                                                                    I
      v           MI      t                         -        ,.   ...       .    .. •   .•' I     .  	,  ...  V
 B.1.2 Method Application
      WHPA delineation methods used in the Cape Cod comparative analysis included (1) a
 calculated fixed radius method, (2) two analytical methods (tfie uniform flow model  and
 the Strahler prism model), and (3)  a numerical model. Comparative analyses of delineated
.areas were done for two wells.                                                  '              f
 Calculated Fixed Radius. The calculated fixed radius (CFR) method  used  was the Florida
 Department of Environmental Resources  volumetric flow  equation  (De Han,  1986).
 WHPA's  delineated with the CFR  equation were delineated based on travel-time criteria
 of 10,25, and 50 years.
 Analytical Methods. The first analytical method used was the uniform flow model (Tpdd,          j»
 1980) (see  Chapter 4).   The model  was used to estimate |he downgradient and  lateral
 extent of the WHPA's.   The upgradient boundaries for these examples were determined
 using 10-, 25-, and 50-year TOT distances determined from a travel time equation used in          v
                                      • i  i i   , „    ,,,,•,,,	: 	 ,	',, , ,	, , 	   I,,, ,,  t , ,„	I,, i	
 England (see Chapter 4).  The second analytical method applied, the Strahler prism model
 (Horsley, 1983)  combines analytical and  graphical techniques  (Chapter  4).   With  this
 method,  distances to downgradient  and upgradient WHPA boundaries  were determined         £
 using distance-drawdown curves, and a  model developed for ground-water flow on Cape
 Cod.  The  WHPA's were then delineated as the areas supplying surface recharge to  the

-------
pumping wells, with the calculated downgradient and upgradient bounds being the
delineated area of recharge.
Numerical Method. WHPA's delineated with the numerical model were, obtained from a
1985 study in which time-dependent (10-, 25-, and 50-year) ZOC's were delineated for six   '
wells in the area (Camp, Dresser, and McKee, 1986), using a three-dimensional finite
element model for ground-water flow and transport.
B.1.3 Data Requirements
   ,    \ .   ,     '
 Data used in the CFR and analytical methods are listed in Table B-l. These
   f,
     _
at best global approximations to the spatially varying parameters. In contrast, the
numerical model can take into account aquifer heterogeneities and the impact of flow
boundaries (such as lakes and streams) in the area of WHPA delineation. The spatially
changing parameters in the model are described in the original report by CDM (1986).
B.1.4 Comparison of Resulting WHPA's            *
 Figures B-2 through B-7 show the delineated WHPA's for the two wells on Cape Cod
using the CFR equation, the numerical model, the uniform flow model, and the Strahler
prism model. For well 1 (Figures B-2 through B-*) the uniform flow model provided the
largest area of coverage for TOT's of 10, 25, and 50 years. The Strahler prism model
provided less coverage than the numerical model for a 50-year TOT, although the overlap
with the numerical model was considerable. In several comparisons, the CFR equation   F
was found to delineate the smallest area, and is therefore the least accurate of the
methods. In addition, the CFR equation was less accurate as the criteria threshold
increased. These deviations from the standard WHPA can be attributed to the fact that
the CFR equation does not account for conditions of a sloping water table (i.e., gradient is
not one of the parameters in the equation).
     ' ' ' • '•'  -  ' ' •'  '•  •' -B
 In the case of well 2, the uniform flow model provided results comparable to the   "
numerical model, as is shown in Figures B-5 through B-7. The relative accuracy of the.
results is apparently due to the smaller effect of flow boundaries (such as surf ace water
bodies) on ground water near the well, the uniform flow model provided the largest area
of coverage, followed by the Strahler method. Both of these methods, provided a larger
area of coverage than the numerical model, with a high degree of commonality. As with   .
well 1, the CFR equation was found to provide the least area, although it relatively better   •
for the smaller TOT's. This probably reflects the regional slope of the water table.
        B-5

-------
1	

•:,
 to
 O
 CD

tC

 2
 O
 Q-

 o
u
fl)
C
c
o
     O
   TJ

     S

     I
    O
   "O
                  Ul

                  §
                      CO

                  00   U»

                  "   S5
                          CM
                                       2   2
                  Ul
                                              S  2   2  *•  d

      UJ

      i
                                                                                    1
                                                                         n


                                                                         1

                                                                         1
                                                                         £


                                                                         I

                                                                         I
                                                       Z   S!  CD

 {2
5
 o

 s
 o
    en
    0)     3
    ut     J
      111


      cc
      O
      u.
      IU

                                       5  «   S
o
o>
O)
          (A
          O
                 01
Ul



DC

O
U.

Ul
                 §
           K   ^

           K    ^
           W   5
                                       •»
                                                 to   e   e   cc
       '.!	[j
                                                                   £0
                                                                   S
                                                                   §>
                                                                               o
                                                                               u
                                                                               S
                                                                        £
                                                                        o
                                                                                             |
                                    B-6

-------
                    Figure B-2
    WHPA Comparative Analysis, Example lor
     Well  # 1  Cape Cod, MA, 10-Year TOT
—•— ANALYTICAL MODEL
       CALCULATED FIXED RADIUS
       EQUATION
                                                                  I
                                                                   \
                                                                   f
                        B-7
                                                                   1

-------
%t
Figure B-3 1
WHPA Comparative Analysis, Example for
Well #1 Cape Cod, MA, 25- Year TOT
V
*•"—••» NUMERICAL MODEL
•••MiMBMBB ANALVTICAI MnnPt
4,^«/ /**V0.VH'
yfas**' : '^""! ^s^ * -' ' ' ; • - • --
-.
E
i
B

-------
                 Figure B-4
WHPA Comparative Analysis, Example for
  Well #1  Cape Cod,  MA,  50-Year TOT
   NUMERICAL MODEL
   ANALYTICAL MODEL

   STRAHLER PRISM MODEL

   CALCULATED FIXED RADIUS
   EQUATION
                                   WILDLIFE ' /~7"
                                                                 I
                     B-9

-------
                                     T t
                Figure B-5
WHPA Comparative  Analysis Example for
 Well #2   Cape Cod,  MA  10 Year TOT
SCALE
                                 NUMERICAL MODEL
                                 ANALYTICAL MODEL
                                 CALCULATED FIXED
                                 RADIUS EQUATION
                   B-10
                                                             E
                                                             I

-------
                    Figure B-6
     WHPA  Comparative Analysis Example for
   %  Well #2 Cape Cod, MA  25^Year TOT
SCALE
NUMERICAL MODEL
ANALYTICAL MODEL
CALCULATED FIXED
RADIUS EQUATION
                         B-ll

-------
                       Figure B-7
      WHPA Comparative  Analysis Example for
        Well #2  Cape Cod, MA, 50-Year TOT
SCALE
              NUMERICAL MODEL
 ••— • • m—mm ANALYTICAL MODEL
 •••••••••••MI SYRAHLER PRISM MODEL
 »••••••••• CALCULATED FIXED
	    RADIUS EQUATION
                                                                   f
                                                                  f
                         B-12

-------
    SOUTHERN FLORIDA
1 •.    '   •  ' V.'        .         '     •      '   .-       ',               '             •       ''   '
B.2.1 Hydrogeology of Study Area
      Virtually all of southeast Florida's residential, commercial, and industrial water is             I
supplied by hundreds of public and private wells that tap the Biscayne Aquifer. The top of
this aquifer lies  just 2 to 5 feet beneath the  ground  surface, and it is recharged by
rainfall, streams, canals, and lakes.  Approximately 80 to 150 feet deep in place,  the
aquifer thins along the western boundaries of the study area.  The lithology  is largely
permeable limestones and sandstones.  Ground-water flow  in the  aquifer is  primarily
horizontal and eastward, toward the sea.                                                          f
B.2.2 Method Application                             ,                   .
      Delineation methods used in the Southern Florida comparative analysis were  the
CFR equation, an analytical model, and a numerical model., The comparison was done for
a well field consisting of three wells.  WHPA's were delineated for all  methods based on
TOT criteria thresholds of 30, 210, and 500 days (the County's WHPA criteria).                        .
Calculated Fixed Radius.  The  CFR equation used was Florida's volumetric equation (see
Chapter 4).
Analytical Method. The analytical technique applied was the uniform flow model (Todd,
 1980). For modeling purposes, the well field was analyzed as a single well.
Numerical Model.  The numerical  model used was a three-dimensional finite difference             «
 model (McDonald and Harbaugh, 1984) in which  WHPA's were delineated based upon
drawdown and TOT criteria thresholds (Dames & Moore, 1986).
B.2.3 Data Requirements                                             ,               '
      Data requirements for each  method are listed in  Figure B-l.  Similar parameters
were used as input in each method; they were obtained from a report on the. numerical
modeling  study and are shown in Table B-l.  Figure B-l shows that not all hydrogeologic             *
parameters were used for each method of delineation. The numerical model required the
most data and was assumed to provide the most accurate results. In addition, this method
was the only method that could take into account the impacts of flow boundaries (such as
canals) in the area of WHPA delineation.

       '•''.    "'.'    '  ''.  *      '•         .	           .              •.•-':'          I
                                        B-13
                                            .    .   "'•-•'•".          ..''...    '•"       .:  i

-------
      Comparison of Resulting WHPA's
        t.-  •    '   -        '   	  •' ' '            •   •  .'•  •"' ':  • •  .;.'•-'" '• ":	
      The*VCFR approach provided a moderate overlap with and less coverage than the
numerical model for TOT's of 30, 210, arid 500 days, as shown In Figures B-8 through B-10.
              ' "   	Ml '    ' ll  I  '  ''l «" ,,M  , ' ",. ' |,"h ,. I  ' I      ',!'   " 7 'l 	' ' ,I,P 'I	..I ^K : :	  < . I ,	,1 i ,111 **
For this well field, no surface-water flow boundary features are located  near the well
field that affect ground-water flow, although many canals that  could  have such  effects
are located in well-field areas in southern Florida.  The relatively flat water-table slope
in this area is another factor critical to the closer match among  methods than in the
latter Cape Cod example.
                                                                                             I
                                                                                             E
                                                                                             i

-------
   V.
             Figure  B-8
    WHPA Comparative  Analysis
Example from Florida, 30-Day TOT
         LEGEND

•••••• FDER VOLUMETRIC EQUATION

—^ UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
      NUMERICAL MODEL
      WELL
     0         2000 Feet
                          SeeEnlarged Area
                        se  and Legend
  I .ENLARGED AREA
    • / /     ////I

 ,f
                                                                      I
                         B-15

-------
                      Figure B-9

           WHPA Comparative Analysis

        Example from Florida,  210-Day  TOT
      FOER VOLUMETRIC EQUATION
      UNIFORM FLOW MODEL



      NUMERICAL MODEL
                         See Enlarged

                           and Legend
 I ENLARGED AREA
  "•• / /     ffin




  '
II-
                       ? l/r j
                        B-16

-------
                        Figure B-10
               WHPA  Comparative  Analysis
          Example from  Florida, 500-Day TOT
          ENLARGED AREA
S^R, -31  *
                       f  7'See Enlarged Area
                       N   ?   and Legend
           LEGEND
         FDER VOLUMETRIC EQUATION
         UNIFORM FLOW MODEL

         NUMERICAL MODEL
                                                                       f
I
                            B-17

-------
     CENTRAL COLORADO
    : „ '  ;,.,,  ' i;.   '  : IJ" ' ( :'  ';; ;-"/• '••, .;'•'.  " .' '•' !,' .•: t';"'l>J
      Th**e COP^tive a^y*** *>r *« State of Colorado,are based on unpublished
Information obtained from a joint effort by EPA^Region vra, theColoradoDepartment of
 Health, and the U.S. G«>lpgical  Survey.  As part of of this• pUot^roJejrt effort, WHPA's
 WC1t d€lineate!i •-^H - -^"^W^Y ^ travel-time criteria and the application of an
 analytical  method  (the uniform flow  equations  by  Todd,  1980)for  the purpose  of
 determining zones of contribution to wells used by the Cherokee Water District.
    "	i..1     •"   . '  ; ;vt! :•:•* '.,',"•  ".: ••).;•.   - ."• ['',-"' -::/.'[ 'i I , j.'i^tV.?.•'" *f""
B3.1' Hydrogeology of Study Area   '   ' '  , 	'
       Currently, the Cherokee Water District witodraws watec from the Black Squirrel         '
  Aquifer and exports it to suburbs east of Colorado Springs and to the Falcon Air Fprce
  Station.  The aquifer is located about 25 miles east of Colorado Springs.  The setting is
  largely rural, and toe wells are subject to contamination from  agricultural sources. The
  Black Squirrel basin is drained by Black Squirrel Creek and its tributaries. Streams iq the
  area are intermittent, flowing only in response to thunderstorms, snowmelt, and prolonged
  rainfall.  All streams are ephemeral and do not provide dependable sources of, water. The         '
 basin is underlain by an alluvial aquifer and the four bedrock aquifers of the Denver Basin.
       The Black Squirrel Creek aquifer is approximately 100 square miles in extent (at a
 saturated thickness of at  least 60 feet) and ..receives surfacer,Scharge from an  area  of
 approximately 350 square miles.  Average annual recharge is estimated  to be 0.6 to 1.3
 inches.  Recharge to the alluvial aquifer is about 9,000 aore^i:eet per year, as infiltration         [
 of precipitation and upward leakage  from  bedrock  aquifers.   Natural discharge  is
 estimated to be equally  divided  between  evapotranspiration  from  ground water and
 ground-water outflow at toe downgradient end of the basin.
                                             ,                        '              i
              1 „   	!,i,:    'i,   ' .. „ in " ,  i  ^ i " t •	,i 'i , ,„ i. , !T , | »  • .„ »...,;• •	,'!•„! "•, :• „ ji ii',.!i.i  i1 in i "Jim i", i>i|i	i!iii,;;'|i	 ; ,, i,|,, ,,:[» ,i;,;	i,, I,:,|HM, i1-: vj", ,,i; „ ,'.'.,'„	.•, f " ':,„"(	r A iiiK^W1 *.'iWhilim'VMi.jiii.ii
      The  source of water  to the wells tapping toe alluvial aquifer  is  primarily from
 aquifer storage.   Therefore, ground-water withdrawals have lowered toe  water table and
 reduced toe discharge to evapotranspiration.  Changes  in ground-water  outflow due to         §
 pumping have been small.  Changes in leakage from bedrock aquifers are not known, but
 are assumed to be smalL  Withdrawals from ground water have been about 11,000  acre-
 feet per year, 8,000 for agricultural consumption and 3,000 for municipal use.  The source
of this water has been storage in the alluvial aquifer^andi. salvage of  ground water that
 would have been  los| to evapotranspiration. Obtaining accurate Jnowledge of sources and          •,
losses, affecting  toe^ aquifer  is  complied  by  wells'^''^t/'^	^used".',,
seasonally for agricultural irrigation.	"   "'"''"	"'"	'  '"  ""'	"'	"'
                                                                                        ::iiin""!k':i;irii I'llpUnii	i
                                                                        •	?, \  r'ii!.i 'I,1:
                                                                        "''.i:1!'!11". "fi.;,11'1! i1""!
                                        \    •••' .,.',' " ',•" y-" *	;n..i. ,1'K1*1'- ,l 	If1".. .'""',„'.';;, "	--.A •• ." K:'|I :•', '[^r.'^.iff.j1	^	ft'i;	Ti'vK
                                       B-18

-------
 B.3.2 Method Application
'.--•'    '\-i-  '     •   "     •"     '      '-.'•'    ••'.        '••'-.
       WHPA ^delineation  methods used in the  Colorado  comparative analysis included
    V   '   '         '             '     '      i        -                                  *         '
 calculated fixed radius and analytical methods.  A comparative analysis was done for one
 well.                                                                                         I
 Calculated Fixed Radius. The calculated fixed radius (CFR) method used was the Florida
 volumetric equation (see Chapter 4).  WHPA's were delineated for travel times of 1 and 5
 years.
 Analytical Method.  The analytical method applied, the uniform flow model (Todd,  1980),
 was used to estimate the downgradient and lateral envelope of the WHPA. The upgradient            f
 boundaries were determined using 1-, 5-, and 20-year TOT distances determined by the
 regional ground-water flow velocity, determined from non-pumping water-level maps for
 the area.

      Two approaches were used tp apply the uniform flow model. The first approach was
 described in Chapter 4. In the second approach, the uniform model was applied by the            I
 USGS in a slightly different way. The ZOC to the pumping well was assumed to reach its            *
 maximum calculated width at the well rather than at some distance upgradient from the
 well, as assumed  with the first  approach.   Also, a buffer zone was added beyond the
 calculated ZOC for the well.  The buffer zone was computed by doubling the distance
 from the well to the  downgradient null  point  2  (X^) and from the well tp  the  ZOC
 boundary 2 (YL> (Figure 4-7).  The buffer zone was extended outward from the calculated            .
 ZOC boundary at the well by 50  feet for every  100 feet of distance upgradient from the
 well.
                             ')                       ,        ,                            I '
 B.3.3  Data Requirements
      Data used  in the CFR and analytical methods for the Colorado comparative analysis
 are listed in Table  B-l. The parameters shown in Table B-l  were obtained from,USGS
 studies in the area and parameters reflect conditions around the wells.                               •
 B.3.4  Comparison of Resulting WHPA's
      Figures  B-ll  through B-13  show the delineated  WHPA's for the well in Colorado
 using the CFR and the two approaches using the uniform flow model.  For the 1-year TOT
 threshold, the WHPA's delineated using the different methods were relatively similar.  For
 the 5-year TOT, however, there is less  similarity among WHPA's delineated using the            I
                                        B-19

-------
 various  methods-   Differences ^"e  JB«!y. due  to the  fact  that the CFR  does not
 Incorporate the regional slope of the water table, as the analytical methods do.
        >    ,,  	:.,.       .                  . ...  .    '.-..:	:	   (. , . ...
4     For the 20-year TOT distances,, only the two approaches used in the analytical
 methods are compared.  The  WHPA's delineated  with the  two  methods are relatively
 similar, though the USGS-delineated WHPA is wider near  the well.  With the addition of
the buffer 7»ne in |he USGS approach, however, the: resulting  WHPA's are substantially
larger.  Since the effects of the irrigation wells and irrigation flow returns have not been
included in this comparative analysis, the addition of a buffer zone to the analytically
determined WHPA's appears to be a reasonably conservative approach.
                                                                                            I
                                       B-20

-------
                  Figure  B-ll
WHPA Comparative Analysis, Example from
            Colorado, 1-Year TOT
                           >  „  V
                                       UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
                                       UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
                                       (DELINEATED BY U.S.G.S.)
                                       FDER VOLUMETRIC EQUATION
                                       WELL

-------
                    Figure B-12
 WHPA Comparative Analysis, Example from
             Colorado,  5-Year TOT
2000 Feet
— — — — — UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
           UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
           (DELINEATED BY U.S.G.S.)
         • FDE-R VOLUMETRIC EQUATION
         • WELL
                            «„;	•/•'v.MiS^&nljittL&issSsiM.i'li'J
                                                                  -il

-------
                      Figure B-13
    WHPA Comparative  Analysis, Example from
      Colorado, 20-Year TOT and Buffer Zone
      2000 Feet
SCALE
 _— UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
  ...   • UNIFORM FLOW MODEL
      (DELINEATED BY U.S.G.S.)
™ ^~ BUFFER ZONE
      (DELINEATED BY U.S.G.S.)
     • WELL  _j	
                                                                       E
                          B-23
                                    I

-------
       I
 B.* SOUTHWESTERN CONNECTICUT
 ^     In 11985, the Connecticut Department of Environmental Protection, in cooperation
 with the U.S. Geological Survey, conducted a comprehensive study of the ground-water         \
 resources of the Cannondale Aquifer in southwestern Connecticut (Meade and Knowlton,     ,
 1985).   That study  served as the basis  and  major source:  of information  for  the
 comparative analysis  presented in this section. The Cannondalle Aquifer is located in the         «
 town of Wilton, which is approximately 6 miles north of the city* of Norwalk.
 B.t.1 Hydrogeology of the Study Area     ,<
      The Norwalk River basin is very similar, both geologically and hydrologically, to
 most of the  river basins  in southwestern Connecticut.   The  basin is  underlain  by
 crystalline bedrock, discontinuously covered by unconsolidated sand and gravel stratified
 drift deposits. These deposits exhibit a capacity to store and transmit water greater than
 does the underlying crystalline bedrock.  This capacity of the deposits to transmit water,
 along with their hydraulic connection to the streams flowing through valleys containing
 the stratified  drift deposits, make such stream-valley systems the most prolific type of
 aquifer for public water supplies in southwestern Connecticut.
      The Cannondale Aquifer consists of stratified drift deposits covering a land surface
 area of approximately 0.32  square mile, with  a maximum  thickness  of  140 feet.
 Approximately 30 percent (0.15 square mile) of the aquifer has a saturated thickness of
 less than 10 feet. The Norwalk River runs north-south through the aquifer for a length of
 about 7,000 feet and a width ranging from 5 to 50 feet.
      Precipitation, falling on both the stratified drift deposits and the surrounding till-
 bedrock uplands, is the major source  of water  that recharges the stratified drift aquifers.
 Water derived from both rainfall and snow melt directly  on  the stratified drift deposits
 seeps into  the ground  and percolates through the unsaturaited  zone  where losses  to
 evapotranspiration and soil  moisture occur.  The remainder of the  water reaches  the
 water table and is incorporated into  the ground-water flow system.  Very little water is
 lost from the stratified drift deposits as a result of overland runoff.
B.4.2 Method Application
      Delineation methods used in the Connecticut comparative analysis were a calculated
 fixed radius equation, an analytical model, and a numerical model,  the comparison was
done for a well field consisting of two wells.
: f'h	•,:., '"""iiijW'i!,",, "ft,	

-------
 Calculated  Fixed Radius.   The  calculated fixed radius  method used  was the Florida
 volumetric equation (see Chapter  4). WHPA's were delineated for TOT's of 1 and 5 years.  .
    f               -  -                   ,          -         . . .                    -   -  -  •     ,
 Analytical Method.  The analytical model used to estimate the downgradient and lateral             [
 extents  of  the WHPA was the  uniform  flow model  (Todd,  1980).   The upgradient
 boundaries were determined from a travel-time equation used in England (see Chapter 4).           •
 WHPA's  were delineated for TOPs of 1 and 5 years.  The two wells were treated as a
    •••'..          •                      '           •      •            '              ' '
 single well in the uniform flow model application.
 Numerical Model.  The numerical  model  used was a two-dimensional finite-difference
 ground-water flow model  (Trescott, et al.y  1976)  applied by the USGS  (Meade and             i
 Knowlton, 1985). WHPA's were delineated based  upon flow boundaries defining the ZOC
 to a pumping well and drawdown criteria defining the ZOI.
 B.4.3 Data Requirements                                                                        ~
      Parameters used in the Connecticut comparative analysis are shown in Table B-l.
 The parameters used were obtained from a report on the numerical modeling study (Meade             |
 and Knowlton, 1985).  In this study, extensive data collection was done to characterize
 hydrogeologic parameters.  Parameters were found to vary throughout the study area and
 the parameters used in the  comparative analysis were those closest to the wells for which
 the WHPA's were delineated.
B.4.4 Comparison of Resulting WHPA's
                            .         '-.'••         •                ...            •           E
      Figures B-14 and B-15 show the resulting WHPA's for the two  wells in Connecticut
 delineated with the CFR method, analytical model, and numerical model. For a TOT of 1
year  (Figure  B-l4)  results of the CFR  and  analytical  model are relatively similar.
However, WHPA's delineated with these methods  are smaller than those delineated with
the numerical model using flow boundaries and drawdown as criteria.
      For the  5-year TOT's, the CFR and analytical  model provide  greater  variation in             k
results.  The larger  difference  is  likely  due  to the effects  of regional ground-water
gradients.  The CFR and analytical model also provide results geometrically different
from  the numerical model.  This is probably because the CFR and analytical models do not
account for flow boundaries, such  as streams  and geologic contacts, that significantly
affect ground water flowing to this well field.        .
                                                                                               i
                                       B-25

-------
                       Figure B-14
    WHPA  Comparative Analysis, Example from
                Connecticut, 1-Year TOT
      2000 Fttt
     	I
SCALE
•M^^MBMI NUMERICAL MODEL,
           HYDROGEOLOGIC
           MAPPING (ZOI AND ZOO
— •—i •— •> ANALYTICAL MODEL
                                          CALCULATED FIXED
                                          RADIUS EQUATION
                          B-26
                                     1

-------
                       Figure B-15
     WHPA Comparative Analysis, Example  from
    %          Connecticut,  5-Year TOT
      2000 Feet
SCALE
m—m—m NUMERICAL MODEL,
           HYDROGEOLOGIC
           MAPPING (ZOI AND ZOO

'—— — — ANALYTICAL MODEL
•••••••• CALCULATED FIXED
           RADIUS EQUATION
                                                                         i
                          B-27
                                         e

-------
 B.5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
      1 * V. '       "     "  J"         '   '                                        '
      Different methods can provide significantly different levels of accuracy for WHPA
^delineation around a well field. This is'particularly true if surf ace. water affects ground-
 water flow or heterogeneous hydrogeologic conditions exist.  The process of deciding on a
 method for delineating WHPA*s in an area should include consideration of the validity of
 the method under existing hydrogeologic conditions in the area (including flow boundaries
 and gradients), the desired accuracy, and the cost/implementation tradeoffs  in moving
                                                                             ,,	,,„ ,
 from relatively simple to more comprehensive methodologies. Comparative analyses have
                : • i •  •    •       ,  '  ., • • j •" v ,, i i • " •   • • ,*..,;- -;nj i,"1:«!";,"' i1,,;'!"" • -,i« IR :;; W;iiV::'i :r	•.;: ••,'! „; • t.fv •.;, • ',";, - :•,?;'::,, «":, • \	i •',.,,v;,:'..'.
 also been shown useful for evaluating criteria and criteria thresholds for consideration in
 State WHP programs.
      The methodology and nomenclature used to evaluate the comparative analyses are
 shown in. Figure B-16. Table B-2 is a summary of the comparative analyses for the four
 different localities. The table shows the results of each method and considers the percent
 of mutual coverage, under-protection relative to the largest area, and erroneous coverage
    	 '           •. ' 'Hi   '     '     "    ''   !' ""  	'! , - "• ii !', • „'',"„«" • "":",','. v	DM!1	• '•' I1!' ',, I" "              j
 relative to the method  considered to be the  most accurate.  Results  are shown for a 5-
 year TOT for the Connecticut example, a 500-day TOT for the''Florida "example'," and a 50-
 year  TOT for the Cape Cod example.  Because WHPA's delineated by numerical modeling
 were not available as a standard for comparison for the Colorado example, its results are
 not shown in Table B-2.
      For the  Connecticut  comparative analysis,  the CFR model covered the entire
 numerically delineated WHPA and did not under-protect.  However, this method provided
 considerable erroneous coverage when compared with the numerically delineated WHPA.
 For this example,  the  low accuracy was due to  the effects  of  flow  boundaries and
 significant regional ground-water gradients not incorporated in the CFR model.
      For the analytical model in the Connecticut example, the method covered nearly all
 of the numerically delineated  WHPA  and provided relatively little under-protection.
 However, as with the CFR model,  significant erroneous coverage was due to the effects
 of flow boundaries.
      For the Florida comparative analysis, the WHPA delineated with the CFR model was
 about half the size of the numerically generated WHPA  and ho erroneous coverage was
 provided.  The analytically generated WHPA, however,  covered all  of the numerically
 generated WHPA and provided  only a  slight amount of  erroneous protection.  For tills
"1
                                         B-28

-------
V
                  Figure  B-16
Comparative Analysis Nomenclature
          Percent mutual coverage = (Am/Altd) X 100%
          Percent under protection = (Au/A,td) X 100%
          Percent erroneous coverage =  (   7  *" )X 100%
                                   V   "ltd /
 WHERE:
    A«d = Area given by the method used as the standard for comparisons.
    Ae  •- Area given by method to be evaluated.
    An,  = Area mutually covered by both methods.
    Au  = Area not covered by method being evaluated.
                            B-29
                                                                            I

-------
 to

JS
 Q.


 O

£

my>
*to
 >.
 (D
to  5

•at
ll
 V)

•MM*

 a
 10

 GJ
    D

    E

    E
    a
               s
             •
NECT
              c

              S
              o
              u
                    K
                    U.

                    U
                    c
                    u.
                    o
                    e
                    u.
                    u
                    e
                    u.
                    u
                             8
                             15
                                8

                                        S.
                                        IS
                                        §
                                        g
                                           g
                                                     S
                                                        S-
                                                        g
                                                    CO
                                                   IL.OO
                                                   uJZff
                                                   ogui


                                                   iiu oc O
                                                   IB.UIO
                                                                     te
                                                                     D.


                                                                     i
                                                                        •s
                                                                        (D
                                                                        •o
                                                                        £
                                                                        A
                                                             •8
                                                             K
                                                                     «> in in in


                                                                     91 o o o
                                                                     » **• »»-••-


                                                                     ^ c c: c
                                                                     •D o o o
                                                                     o -o -o -o

                                                                     E c c c
                                                                     _ o o o


                                                                     *Z^ ID CD TO
                                                                     0) O. Q. D.

                                                                     E E E E
                                                                 Z  ^ rg co TT
                                                                                      I
                                                                                   i
                                 B-30

-------
 comparative analysis, the CFR and analytical models provided more accurate protection
 than  in  the%£onnecticut example because  Water table gradients are lower and  flow
 boundaries are generally absent.
      For the Massachusetts comparative analysis, the CFR equation provided a relatively
 high degree of both under-protection and erroneous coverage. The analytical model, in
 contrast, provided  a high degree  of mutual coverage and a small amount of under-
 protection.  However, this method provided a relatively  large area of erroneous coverage.
The differences in the delineated WHPA's for this comparison were due to the presence of
significant  regional ground-water gradients and' the presence of hydrologic boundaries,
including ponds and streams.
                                                                                                I
                                                                                                I
                                      B-31

-------
                        Ill  Hill   illlilllllllllllilll
	In   1	hi    i    '
       •        in      IK   '         in

-------
                                        APPENDIX C
                 H-                      GLOSSARY
        »*.'•''       '         '     ;     .     '-._..''-
  *",'•"'       •                    .                    -             '                    m
          The  purpose of this  Glossary  is to  provide  a list of terms commonly used  by              I
     hydrogeologists,  as well as some specific terms used  in ground-water  contamination
     assessments and  wellhead protection.  The definitions provided in this glossary are not
*    necessarily endorsed  by EPA nor are they to  be viewed as  suggested language for
     regulatory  purposes.  Not  all of these terms appear in this  document.  Numbers in
     parentheses indicate the reference sources for most of the hydrogeologic terms; the major
     source  was (1).   Some adaptations of the definitions in these published references is              t
     included.

                                  GLOSSARY REFERENCES
          (1)   Subsurface-Water Glossary Working Group.  1987.  Subsurface-water flow and
               solute transport—glossary of selected terms.  Ground-Water Subcommittee,              m
               Interagency Advisory Committee on Water Data. (Unpublished review draft).             .,•'*
          (2)   Driscoll, F.  G. 1986.   Groundwater and Wells.  Second Edition, 3ohnson
               Division, St.  Paul, Minnesota.              ;
          (3)   Fetter, C. W., 1980.  Applied  Hydrogeology.  Charles E. Merill Publishing
               Company, Columbus, Ohio.
        :  (4)   Bates, R. L. and 3. A. 3ackson.  Glossary of Geology.  American Geological
               Institute, Falls Church, Virginia.
          (5)   Laney, R. L., and  C. B. Davidson.  1986.  Aquifer Nomenclature Guidelines.
               U.S. Geological Survey Open File Report 86-534.
          (6)   American Society  of Civil  Engineers.   1985.  Ground Water  Management.
               Manual 40.                                                                             *

                                        GLOSSARY
*   Absorption. The  process by which substances in gaseous, liquid, or  solid form dissolve or
    mix with other substances (6).
/"Adsorption.  Adherence of ions or molecules in solution to the surface of solids (1). The              I
    assimilation  of gas, vapor, or  dissolved matter  by  the surface  of a solid (2).   The
                                            C-l

-------
  attraction and adhesion of a layer of ions from an aqueous solution to the solid mineral
  surfaces; with which it is in contact (3).
 tAdvection.   The process  whereby solutes are transported by  the .bulk mass of flowing
  fluid (1).  The process by which solutes are transported by the bulk motion of the flowing
  ground water (2).
i !!,|'' / »',.!,<, I", ii1,'1 "•	I" ill if,!
 Alluvial.  Pertaining  to or composed of alluvium or deposited by a stream  or  running
 water (2).
                            .  • >         ''!,„,	                  I             1
 Alluvium.  A general term for  clay, silt,, and sand, gravel, or similar, unconsolidated
 material deposited during comparatively recent geologic time by a stream or other body
 of running water as a sorted or  semisorted sediment in the bed of the stream or oo Us,
 floodplain or delta, or  as a cone or fan at the base of a mountain slope  (2).
                   , HI, »'          •    "  i      |i ,„      ,  i I,.  ,	i' ,'!,	 , '', ,' ',1	!»'''ii'	l,i|!l'il"ii|:''' , •• 'I '! "f ' '  'i i, !• '  V ' \\ \ ', ,"' ,'!' I ,  ' ."I'I.1:1
 Analytical model.  A model that provides approximate or exact  solutions to simplified
      •,  , •          ' i ,ir     . •   '  '.   •  ••     .''I :  ,; „•'.• ! !,;":' ! 	::;': ••*,! v";;;	'• m-	i(j'M^;.,,L/:. i-nrv, V"i*;v:.'.."	::"<.•..•".."••	-,...	•,•..„	,-
 forms of the differential equations for water movement and solute transport.  Analytical
                   " '. '"ill              ' '    ''','!, V..' !' ' ''	'• "  .':'.','' f.f	 "'ii "' .,(,' "' H'.'&'.'liTJ1!'1^  '' ,' . •, . ', .  !-"ll "	', Vj  (	 ;, 	,..,;.		r	
 models can generally be solved with calculations or computers.
 Anisotropy.  The  condition of having different properties in different directions (1).'  The
 condition under  which  one or  more  of the  hydraulic properties of an  aquifer vary
 according to the direction of flow (3).
 Anthropogenic. Involving the impact of man on nature; induced or altered by the presence
 and activities of man.
                    "• ,         ,'•••:•' i .-;' .  " •••', •','•.','„',!.'.',' :'••• ":('';'!,;'•/.«:'[•'-.'.   ' •• i.'..i.',r;1'.1 •'.•	''.•'• „,:,(  I •            f
 Aquifer. A formation, group of formations, or part of a formation that contains sufficient          K
   	              , i     •      '  "  ..    i  M'1'!.  f' '.' ,".."  ',.' '-"!,'	", ,i" :. iirlM*	I'l:,,'! :'i I'i'-1;1.11 ".';,'!:/:'!•'!'.'	t, '!"i";, '""ir'I'S1''1;
 saturated permeable material to  yield sufficient, economical quantities of water to wells
 and springs (1,2).   Rock  or sediment  in a formation, group of formations, or part of a
 formation that is saturated and sufficiently permeable to transmit economic quantities of
 water to wells and springs (3).                             '
 Aquifer  system.   A  body of  permeable and  relatively  imj>ermeable  materials that          |
 functions regionally as a water-yielding unit.  It comprises two or more permeable units
                               1 '  "  ' ' I  '  ''• '"'-   ''  ": '•'>'• '" ' !| '•''•• !i •1|'1'1 '• "''' i*1*"''"'1! """- -"'"I ""^ '•*• ••''	•'!" •  "I'./'.11 .1:  f - •••,. '*"• i-™.1 "-' i'i,:v,!," 	
 separated at  least locally by confining units that impede ground-water movement but do  •
 not  greatly affect the regional  hydraulic continuity of the  system.   The  permeable
 materials can include both saturated and unsaturated sections (1).                                   *
Aquifer test.   A  test  to determine  hydrologic properties of  an aquifer, involving  the
withdrawal of measured quantities of water from, or addition of water to, a well and the          i
                                           C-2

-------
    measurement of resulting changes in head in the aquifer both during and after the period
    of discharge ^addition (1,2).
 ,  Area of influence.  Area surrounding a pumping or recharging well within which the water              i
    table or potentiometric surface has been changed due to the well's pumping or recharge
    (1).
4   Artesian.  Commonly used expression, generally synonymous with (but less favored term
    than) "confined."

    Artesian aquifer.  Commonly used expression, generally synonymous with (but less favored
    term than) "confined aquifer."                                                                   -   F
    Artesian well. A well deriving its water from a confined aquifer (2).                        ,
    Attenuation.  The process of diminishing contaminant concentrations in ground water, due
    to filtration, biodegradation, dilution, sorption, volatilization, and other processes.
    Base flow.   That  part of  stream  discharge  not  attributable  to direct runoff  from              f
    precipitation or snowmelt, usually sustained by ground-water discharge (1). That part of a              I
    stream  discharge derived from ground water seeping into the stream (3),
                                                         /•       ~  '     •     . •
    Bedrock.   A  general term for the rock, usually  solid, that  underlies soil  or  other
    unconsolidated material (2).
   Bernoulli's Equation.  Under conditions of steady flow of water,  the sum of the velocity
    head, the pressure head, and the head due to elevation at any given point is equal to the              |
    sum .of  these heads at any other point plus or minus the head losses between the points due
   to friction or other causes (*).
 .  Breakthrough  curve.   A  plot of  relative concentration versus time,  where relative
   concentration  is defined as C/CQJ the concentration at a point in the ground-water flow
   domain  divided by the source concentration.
      .'-.'••               '                       '            • •      ...- •            •             3
   Calibration. Adjustment of the input data until computed heads match the field values.
   CAPA.  See Critical Aquifer Protection Area.
 ^  Capillary action.  The movement of water within the interstices of a porous medium due
   to the forces  of  adhesion, cohesion,  and surface tension acting in  a liquid that  is in
 ^  contact  with  a  solid.   Synonymous with capillarity,  capillary  flow,  and capillary              a
   migration (1).                                                                                       i
                                           C-3

-------
 Capillary fringe. The zone at the bottom of the vadose zone where ground water is drawn
 upward by capillary force (2).  The zone immediately above the water table, where water
•*is drawn upward by capillary action (3).
 Capillary rise. The height above a free water surface to which water will rise by capillary
 action (1).
     I! „, i       ^    'H,!,,I'  'i"    „        ,i   "                   II     I ,  |J          I
 Capillary water.. Water held in the soil above the phreatic surface by capillary forces; or
 soil water above hydroscopic moisture and below the field capacityTl).
 Carbonate. A sediment  formed by the organic or inorganic precipitation from aqueous
 solution of carbonates of calcium, magnesium, or iron (2).
 Carbonate  rocks.  A rock consisting  chiefly of carbonate minerals, such as limestone and
 dolomite (2).
     1 'J        ' • *  ' >;ii!    "       ••          f                   111  |ii   i i      i
 Clastic.  Pertaining to  a rock or sediment composed principally of broken fragments that
     '"'j i         , f ''ii ' hiiwi; •.,,";,	         I                      I                    |
 are derived from pre-existing rocks or minerals and that  naive been transported  some
 distance from their places of origin (2).
 Coefficient of storage.  The volume of  water an aquifer releases from  or takes into
         11      '  ' '	'	      	   - 	          	:	I	
 storage per unit surface area of the aquifer per unit change in head (2).
 Coefficient of transmissivity. See transmissivity (2).
     '! !'             ,|i "          ,  :.'i' ,"• ' i ;' ; I'i'i::.	-,	 ; ,",]	;"i "' • !,, ",;', , •••„ I'li.jfjlir T", M"!!' i,! illlliiii''!!''!11..!;!1	ilk."'"i"'• '!;«ii!:('•, «' „:". /! jLi'i'J1! •„'!"• ' 'i!,, i*! 'i',,, . •i,:"vK1!' •!•'•'   II
 Colloid. Extremely small solid particles, 0.0001 to 1 micron insize^ which will not settle
 out  of  a  solution; intermediate between a true dissolved particle and a suspended solid,
 which will settle out of  solution (2).
 Cone of  depression (COD).  A  depression in  the ground-water table or potentiometric
surface that has the shape  of an inverted cone and develops around a well from  which
water  is being withdrawn.  It defines (in cross-section) the area of influence of a well.
Also called pumping cone and cone of drawdown (COD) (1,2).
Confined aquifer.  An aquifer bounded above  and below by confining units of distinctly
lower permeability than the aquifer  media; or one containing confined ground water (1).
An aquifer in which ground water is under pressure significantly greater than atmospheric
and its upper limit is the  bottom of a bed of distinctly lower hyraulic conductivity than
that of the aquifer itself.
                                                                                               I
Confining unit.  A hydrogeologic unit of relatively impermeable material, bounding one or
more aquifers. This is a general term that has replaced aquitard, aquifuge, and aquiclude
                                                                                               I
                                                                                               I

-------
 and  is  synonymous with  confining bed (1).   A  body  of material of  low  hydraulic
 conductivity that is stratigraphically adjacent to one or more aquifers. It may lie above
 or below the aquifer (3).                    . .
 Connate water.  Ground water entrapped in the interstices of a sedimentary or extrusive
 igneous rock at the time of its deposition (1).
 Consolidated  aquifer.   An  aquifer  made  up of consolidated rock that has  undergone
 solidification or lithification.
 Contaminant.    An  undesirable  substance not* normally present,  or an  usually high
 concentration of a naturally occurring substance, in water, soil, or  other environmental             I
 medium (1).
 Contamination.  The degradation of  natural water quality as a result of man's  activities.
 There  is  no  implication  of  any  specific  limits,  since  the  degree of permissible
 contamination depends upon the intended end use, or uses, of the water (2).
                            /                ,      •             -              '      -          '
 Convective transport. The component of movement of heat or mass induced by thermal             I
 gradients in ground water (see advection).
 Criteria, WHPA. Conceptual standards that form the basis for WHPA delineation.  WHPA
 criteria  can include distance, drawdown, time of travel, assimilative capacity, and flow
 boundaries.
 Critical Aquifer Protection Area (CAPA).  As defined in the Safe Drinking Water Act, is             V
 (1) all or part of an area located within an area for which an application of designation as
 a sole or principal source aquifer (pursuant to Section U2
-------
                                                                                             i" *«"	I '«	111"	I	J|1
  Density.  Matter measured as mass per unit volume expressed In pounds per gallon (Ib/gal),
  pounds per cubic foot Ob/ft3), and kilograms per cubic meter (kg/n»3) (2).  The mass of
     j •,    	•  •  ,;' ,i Tilt,, 11! *' • ii •'	   j „,::	 « , •."  , : ••• .,,;" i , '!• •, „ •, x,; t' \.i t•,,."- i;; \a\ ••',»/i o< ii	i,;!' ii*|' n; iiftii'iiji1 T : v, liniii11 iilcinwiiii'i r, wi! ,,,:;|.. 11»•• 11" ,,:i A " ,'.'„ i "in - r j ;„,; ,1,1,1 i,' i;i« ir „ n t \ ,1:11,1* fp\ (, "iim	t i	'Mi •* i»	
^quantity of a substance per unit volume.  Units  are kilpgramis p^r.cubic meter or grams
  per	cubic centimeter (3).	  	"'"""	"""	!	'	f
'„     '''„":" , ,     '   ,» ,111;, i .nigi-jiiii! „ , •  '  , , "    i , „,  "  •",.',!,'..''",, ''i1 ,!	! :n<  ,\ ii"1!"1!, V1 '^^i.'^H.V^Ii^i'.l'iii!!!1!:1!11!.1',1"!'!1 ^IIRH'^iiW^     'i'1'1, '"•,;.'.:'" ''i'l'limi •',  '"''J,!1,, ""Si It1 (/im I;1,!,:'!'':!':,',":: In/."ill,.:1 A' h'SB* .lllilllilil'yirli Sin	
  Desorption. See sprption, which is the reverse process.
  Diffusion coefficient. See molecular diffusion.
     '"i,1' ,,           ' '', 	'i ii! ' i •'  	    'i   ,,',,,   I, ' • ''! I1 ji, j',! „ ., ' I,.?,, 1,1",  ' : •, '	"'ll'".'i|;!' i! ,:'	'ii!!!ii'iii!|i! '..iNili'illrll'lilW,,'iifh,, illiiiri""" i 'I,,'!	I'vihiiiil'iiill'..!1'!. i"1!.' l:!r;:i."ii,, .i''i|f!'.. i!in, ':„.,', n'!i> M.' '! '"ill ,„.,. 'iiln. nji1
     i.ilr i,      ,    ,   ..,„,            ,  ,   ,,,,.,   i , ,,  ...     .  	 M,,	ii,,,,iii	 :,, ,,	 :,,,   	 ,, ,	''„ ',„,',   ;,, „
  Diffusivity, soil water.  The hydraulic conductivity  divided by the  differential  water
  capacity, or the flux  of water per unit  gradient of moisture content in the absence of
  other force fields (1).                                                                               f
 Direct precipitation.  Water that  falls directly into a  lake or stream without passing
 through any land phase of the runoff cycle (3).
 Discharge area.  An area in which ground water is discharged ito the land surface, surface
     1111       "    ,	             .  • ' '    	  	, 	"	•;	••	  :	i	:	     i     -   .    .- , •  ••
 watCT» or atmosPne,re ^V. ^ arca j" ^h*cn t!lere are MPW^  coniponents of hydraulic
 head in the aquifer.  Ground water is f towing toward the surface in a discharge area and         I
 may"escape as a spring, seep, or base flow, or by" evapora'tion"ainid	franspiration"	(3).	:"	'	
 Discharge velocity.  An apparent velocity, calculated by Darcy's law, which represents the
 flow  rate at which water  would  move  through an aquifer if the aquifer were  an open
 conduit.. Also called specific discharge (3).
 Dispersion.  The spreading and mixing of chemical constituents in ground water caused by
     	   «•     •	 •   i   ,..,,,,.. , „	 	,„ 	„	ii,,,..,. „, , , ., .,,...	.,	,«»..,„	1*f	, ,„	,	 	, 	j.,,,,,	 , €
 diffusion and "^^S d"«  to microscopic variations in  velocities  within and between
 pores (2).
 Dispersion coefficient.  A measure of  the spreading of a flowing substance  due to the
 nature  of  the  porous  medium  (and  specific substance  or  fluid  properties),  with
 interconnected channels distributed at  random in all directions.  Also the sum of the
 coefficients of mechanical dispersion and molecular diffusion in a porous medium (1).
      'i' ! „     „     '! i  .'vr'lt ,  • "   	 '  "i "'"'i' "     I II                      I I II II I I II   III     I  I      I
     ,', ,'          '   I1" '''i,1!!11 . " i',  '    ,   '  j"   '      I               I     I I I 111 III  11 I   I   "            I
 Dispersivity.   A property of a porous medium (and the specific substance or fluid) that
 determines the dispersion characteristics of the contaminant in that medium by relating
     i ,.. •       • ,   I'.piHi • . ,•  ,  ••.,'. •'••',l•'( • iv•'; i"" e.« •; '. •;';( • i:	". ,'.<:•" f	' i-i	:f,	,::*'li	:	n	iiBi	r;	• wn.'::.,;i i	r•,'• '(,1	* "ii	?,	?r,, *..,7*^7 " P	
 the components of pore velocity to the dispersion coefficient (1).
 Distribution coefficient. The quantity of a solute sorbed per unit weight of a solid divided
 by the quantity dissolved in water per unit volume of water  (1).
Drainage basin. The land area from which surface runoff drains into a stream system (3).
                                            C-6


-------
                  ,•     .         '                  .                 1             '
 Drawdown.   The vertical distance ground-water elevation is lowered,  or the amount
 pressure head is reduced, due Jo  the removal of ground water.   Also  the decline  in
 potentiometric surface caused by the withdrawal of water from a hydrogeologic unit (1).            "
 The Distance between the static water level and the surface of the cone .of depression (2).
 A lowering of the water table of an unconfined aquifer or the potentiometric surface of a            I
 confined aquifer caused by pumping of ground water from wells (3).
 Dynamic equilibrium.  A condition of which the amount of recharge to an aquifer equals
 the amount of natural discharge (3).
 Effective porosity.   The amount of interconnected pore space through which fluids can
 pass, expressed as a percent of bulk volume. Part of the total porosity will be occupied by      v     f
 static fluid being held to the  mineral surface by surface tension, so effective porosity will
 be less than total porosity (3).
 Effluent stream. See gaining stream.
 Equipotential line.  Surface (or line) along  which the potential is constant (1). A contour
 line on the water table or potentiometric surface; a line along which the pressure head of            I
 ground water in an aquifer is the same. Fluid flow is normal to these lines in the direction
 of decreasing fluid potential (2). A line in a two-dimensional ground-water  flow field such
 that the total hydraulic head is the same for all points along the line (3).
 Equipotential surface (line).  A surface (or line) in a three-dimensional ground-water flow
 field such that the total hydraulic head is the same everywhere on the surface (3).
 '-.•'.            ,    .  •  .                                 ^  •  , ,        ^  ,       -.
 Evapotranspiration.  Combined loss of water from a land area, during a specified period of
 time,  through evaporation from the  soil and  transpiration  of plants (2).  The  sum of
 evaporation plus transpiration (3).
Evapotranspiration, actual.  The evaporation that actually occurs under given climatic and
soil-moisture conditions (3).
Evapotranspiration,  potential.  The evapotranspiration  that would  occur  under given             •
climatic conditions if there were unlimited soil moisture (3).
Exchange capacity.   Amount  of exchangeable ions, measured in milliequivalents per 100
grams  of solid material at a given pH. The total ionic charge of the adsorption  complex
active in the adsorption of ions (see cation exchange) (1).

 •           "           '•  •'.  ••-'.'        •'    -'-••      •  ••'•               '    '      I
                                        C-7

-------
 Fissure.  A surface of a fracture  or  crack in a rock  along which there is a distinct
           > 14).    '                     '        .         "'	    !  "'
 Flow line.   The general path that a particle  of water  follows under  laminar flow
 conditions (1).  Line indicating the direction followed by ground water toward points of         »
 discharge. Flow lines are perpendicular to equipotential lines (2).
 Flow model.  A digital computer model that  calculates a  hydraulic head  field for the
      11 ,'» i"    , , '  . .. ' ' .'„	ifl! '!  •                   _        1   I I  II   I I I          .             i             ft
 modeling domain using numerical methods to  arrive at  an approximate  solution to the
 differential equation of ground-water flow.
      >" ' ,          >.'i:	Ml    	 ,   	 •'	.	,,	 	',	'i,	«	mi	..in,!,.	:	-	nun	•	,	,i	,,|	,	
                                    	  •• •	 <•            .           .                 ]..',.
 Flow net.  A graphical representation of flow lines and  equipotential lines for two-         [
 dimensional, steady-state ground-water flow (1).
 Flow path. Subsurface course a water molecule or solute would follow in a given ground-
 water velocity field (1).
 Flow, steady.  A characteristic of a flow system,  where the magnitude and direction of
 specific discharge are constant in time at any point (1).                                           f
      "<	   •    "  '"	'i  '    •>'  '    • .•• •	:" '••'•	 •• -  '• •  	 ••	;•	"	.",	"	i	••'"!• :	i	'"> '	""t1            E
      _i" :    -        _; ;   ;        • ;•  ••	  -, :;• -m _•'; 	; ,;; ;;;;', "__ i;"; ; 'r	;; ";;";;;;;;;;;—~ •;"'" •;;	•;; •,;;r:;,,;;,' .,",;;;; ;.; ;,;;,, j,          ,  B
 Flow, uniform.  A characteristic of a flow system  where specific discharge  has the same
 magnitude and direction at any point (1).
 Flow, unsteady  (nonsteady).  A characteristic of a flow system where the magnitude
 and/or direction of the specific discharge changes with time (1).
 Flow velocity. See specific discharge.                                                           r
 Fluid potential.   Mechanical energy per unit mass  of a fluid at any given point in space
 and time, with regard to an arbitrary state and datum (1).
Flux. See specific discharge.
Formation.  A body of rock of considerable thickness that has characteristics making it
distinguishable from adjacent rock unit.
Fracture. A general term for any breaWn a rock, which includes cracks, joints and faults'(4)."
                    	  .               	 •  ;•	,	,	'	I1:.	:	• ' •	I'11	
Gaining stream.  A stream or reach of a stream, the flow of which is being increased by
inflow of ground water. Also known as an effluent stream (3).
Glacial drift.  A general term  for unconsolidated sediment transported by glaciers  and
deposited directly on land or in the sea (2).
C
                                          C-8
                                                                                                 B

-------
GPO. Gallons per day, a measure of the withdrawal rate of a well.                               .
Gravitational fiead.  Component of total hydraulic head related to the position of a given
          '.*•-..             •        •                  '                          ,
masvof water relative to an arbitrary datum (1).
Gravitational water.  Water that moves into, through, or out of a soil or rock mass under             (
the influence of gravity (1).
Ground water,  that part of the subsurface water that is in the saturated zone (1). The
water contained in interconnected pores located below the water table in an unconfined
aquifer or located in a confined aquifer (3).
                             •              •  *                   '        •         >'   :' .-'.'-
Ground-water barrier. Rock or artificial material with a relatively low permeability that             [
occurs (or  is placed) below  ground surface,  where it  impedes the movement of  ground
water  and thus causes a pronounced difference in the heads  on opposite sides  of the            • • v
barrier (1).
Ground-water basin.  General term used  to  define a ground-water flow system that has
defined boundaries  and may include more  than  one aquifer  underlain  by permeable             .
materials that are capable of storing or furnishing a significant water supply.  The basin             I
includes both the surface area and the permeable  materials beneath it (1).  A rather vague
designation pertaining to a  ground-water reservoir that is more or less separate from
neighboring ground-water reservoirs.   A ground-water  basin could be separated from
adjacent basins by geologic boundaries or by hydrologic boundaries (3).
Ground water, confined. Ground water within an aquifer that underlies a confining unit.                r
Ground-water discharge. Flow of water released from the zone of saturation (1).
Ground-water divide.  Ridge in the water table, or potentiometric surface, from which
                               »         .                .           .''-'."
ground water moves away at right angles  in both directions (1).  Line of highest hydraulic
head in the water table or potentiometric surface.
                                        \        •       '     • .     |             .     -    f
Ground-water flow.  The movement of water through  openings in sediment and rock that             g
occurs in the zone of saturation (1).
Ground-water model.  A simplified conceptual or mathematical image of a ground-water
system, describing the feature essential to the purpose  for which the model was developed
and including  various assumptions pertinent  to the system.  Mathematical ground-water
models can include numerical and analytical models.
                                                                                                 I
                                         C-9

-------
                                                                                              I
                                                            Ill
                                                            111

 Ground-water  mound.  Raised area in a water table or other potentiometric surface,
 created ^y ground-water recharge.      .............
                                         '
             i
 %Groij-water recharge.  Process of water addition to the saturated zone, or the volume
 of water added by this process (1).                                                             [
                                 ............. •*"  "  .                  .                 i        ........ ', ................ •"' ......... "
 Head, static.  The height above a standard datum of the surface of a column of water (or
 other liquid) that can be supported by the static pressure at a given point. The static head
 is the sum of the elevation head and the pressure head (1).
 Head, total.  The  sum of  the elevation head (distance of  a point above datum), the
 pressure head (the height of a column of liquid that can be supported by static pressure at         f
 the point), and the velocity head (the height to which the  liquid  can be raised  by its
 kinetic energy) (1).  See also hydraulic head.
                                       '*             ,           .            •        /  ' ,   '      '
 Heterogeneity. Characteristic of a medium in which material properties vary from point
 to point (1).
 Homegeneity.  Characteristic of a medium  in which material properties are identical         m
 throughout (1).     	           "  ,	•	^	-	 *
 Hydraulic barrier.  Modifications to a ground-water flow system that restrict or impede
 movement of contaminants (1).
Hydraulic conductivity (K).   Proportionality constant  relating hydraulic gradient to
specific discharge,  which for an  isotropic medium and  homogeneous fluid, equals the         K
     '	 '       "''• "    '"li'ii" ...          ...:•  'I » '. ',.. '  . ~i..Ji'. "'"' • "i"'.. '	i1'.:,,,	"i."1    >       **           *  ^   	,j	 |^
volume of water at the existing kinematic viscosity that will move in unit time under a         *
unit hydraulic gradient through a unit area measured at right angles to the direction of
flow(l).  The rate of flow of water in gallons per day through a cross section of one
square foot under a unit hydraulic gradient, at the prevailing temperature (gpd/ft^  in
the Standard International System, the units are -m3/day/m2 or m/day (2).  A coefficient
of proportionality describing the  rate  at  which water can move through a permeable         _
                                                              '!•••,      j             g
medium.   The  density and  kinematic viscosity  of the  water must be considered in
determining hydraulic conductivity (2).
Hydraulic conductivity, effective.  Rate of water flow  through a porous medium that
contains more than one fluid (such as water and air in the unsaturated zone), which should         h
be specified in terms of both the fluid  type and content and the existing pressure (1).
Hydraulic gradient  (i).   Slope  of a water  table  or potentiometric  surface.   More         |
specifically,  change in static head per unit of distance in a given direction, generally the
                                        C-10

-------
direction of the maximum rate of decrease in head (1). The rate of change in total head
per unit of Distance of flow in a given direction (2). The change in total head with a
change in distance in a given direction. The direction is that which yields a maximum
rate of decrease in head (3). The difference in hydraulic heads (hi - h2>, divided by the   {
distance (L) along the flowpath.    ''
 i= (hi-h2)/L
Hydraulic head. Height above a datum plane (such as mean sea level) of the column of
, water that can be supported by the-hydraulic pressure at a given point in a ground-water
system. Equal to the distance between the water level in a well and the datum plane (1).    F
Hydrodynamic dispersion. Spreading (at the macroscopic level) of the solute front during
transport resulting from both mechanical dispersion and molecular diffusion (1). The
process by which ground water containing a solute is diluted with uncontaminated ground
water as it moves through an aquifer (see dispersion coefficient) (3).
Hydrogeologic. Those factors that deal with subsurface waters and related geologic   »
aspects of surface waters (2).                 I
Hydrogeologic parameters. Numerical parameters that describe the hydrogeologic
characteristics of an aquifer such as porosity, permeability, and transmissivity.
Hydrogeologic unit. Any soil or rock unit or zone that because of its hydraulic properties
has a distinct influence on the storage or movement of ground water (1).
       f,        . .     .
--„_-	r.	 ..	_._„„..,	j. „„. w,^6,.,. WA woi-ci 01 oiij Bivcu jiutiii in a
body of water at rest (1).
Immiscible. The chemical property where two or more liquids or phases do not readily
dissolve in one another, such as oil and water (1).
Impermeability. Characteristic of geologic materials that limit their ability to transmit
significant quantities of water under the pressure differences normally found  in the   »
subsurface environment (1).
Infiltration. The downward entry of water into soil or rock (1).
Infiltration rate. Rate at which soil or rock under specified conditions absorbs  falling
rain, melting snow, or surface water; expressed in depth of water per unit time. Also, the
maximum rate at which water can enter soil or rock under specified conditions, including   I
the presence of an excess of water; expressed in units of velocity (1).
          C-ll

-------
                                                                                      or
 Influent stream. See losing stream.

 interference.  The;result of two or more, pumping wells, the drawdown cones of which
"intercept.  At a given location, the total well interference is the sum of the drawdowns
                 »         ',„,,'•„',,' r ,,,i •• ,,„ •,',;, r , i,  .i'wi, !!!!!•;::; Kivvi ,,'!!•'i	,ij	,1 „•, .	; inn: ii	IB,™ ,' ' I" " 	/Hi , '',Ih,"'T''',i'i 'Tft'Trt r*^,™*"*,,,
 due to each individual well (3).  The condition occurring when the area of influence of a
 water well comes into contact with or overlaps that of a neighlwing well, as when two
 wells are pumping from the same aquifer or are located near each other (2).
 Interstice.  An opening or space in rock or soil that may be occupied by air, water,
 other fluid; synonymous with void or pore (lj».
'Intrinsic permeability.  Pertaining to the relative ease with which a porous medium can         f
 transmit a liquid under a hydraulic or potential gradient.  It is a  property of the porous
 medium and is independent of the nature of the liquid or the potential field (3).
Ion.  Any element or compound that has gained or lost an electron, so that it is no longer
neutral electrically, but carries a charge (2).
Isochrone.  Plotted line graphically connecting all points having the same time of travel         f
for contaminants to move through the saturated zone and reach a well.
Isocoocentration.  Graphic plot of points having the same contaminant concentration
levels.                        "          '             '-  	   "  '
 botropy.  The condition in which the properties of interest (generally hydraulic properties
 of the aquifer) are the same in all directions (1).
                  • . .',   .    .    :   '	• -."   I "  .".,:'•'.  ' ' . '  •'• ,::;•„>'„;.;!liiV :j""?:; 1;\•,:>• :;!-;.:>-::i, !''• i:•'.:  • 'i ':its
 Karst topography. A type of terrain that is  formed on limestonie, gypsum, and other rocks
 by dissolution, and is characterized by sinkholes, caves, and underground drainage (1).
 Kinematic viscosity.  The ratio of dynamic viscosity to mass density.  It is obtained by
 dividing dynamic viscosity by the fluid density. Units of kinematic viscosity  are  square
 meters per second (2).
                           1    • .  '  "" ;-.'i.J/ '..  ' '  v  ':'.•••; ••:; HlfT^iKV!	•.:            
-------
 Leaching.  Removal of materials in solution from rock, soil, or waste; separation or        '
 dissolving out of soluble constituents from a porous medium by percolation of water (1).
 Leakage. Flow of water from one hydrogeologic unit to another. This may be natural, as
 through a somewhat permeable confining layer, or anthropogenic, as through an uncased            I
 well.  It  may also be the natural loss of water from artificial structures, as a result of
 hydrostatic pressure (1).
 Leaky aquifer.   An artesian or  water table aquifer that loses or gains water through
 adjacent semipermeable confining units (1).
 Limestone.  A sedimentary rock consisting chiefly of calcium carbonate, primarily in the            F
 form of the mineral calcite (1).
 Losing stream.  A stream or reach of a stream that is losing water by seepage into the
 ground. Also known as an influent stream (3).
 Matrix. Solid framework of a porous material or system (1).
 Maximum Contaminant Level (MCL).  Maximum permissible level of a contaminant in           §
 water that  is delivered to the users  of a public water system.  MCL is defined more
 explicitly in SDWA regulations (*0 CFR Section 141.2).
 MCL.  See Maximum Contaminant Level.
                                                                              1          ~  '
Mechanical  dispersion.  Process whereby solutes are mechanically mixed during advective
transport, caused  by the  velocity variations at the  microscopic level; synonymous  with           p
hydraulic dispersion (1).  The coefficient of mechanical dispersion is  the component of
 mass transport flux of solutes caused by velocity variations at the microscopic level (1).
   1 '                p           -                      ' .       '     ,  •         / •           •
MGO. Million gallons per day, a measure of the withdrawal rate of a well.
Miscible.  Chemical characteristic of two or more liquids or phases, making them able to
mix and dissolve in each other, or form one phase (1).                                              Ff
Miscible displacement.  Mutual mixing and movement of two fluids that are  soluble in
each other;  synonymous with miscible-phase displacement (1).
Molecular diffusion. Process in which solutes are transported at the microscopic level due
to variations in the solute concentrations within the  fluid phases (1).  Dispersion of a
chemical caused by the kinetic activity of the ionic or molecular constituents (2).
                             ••'.   •    ••-      .         .••'   '      •  '.   ' •       ...  '   "    I
                                        C-13
                                            '.             "              "'.         "  •    '•   .'.  a

-------
   Npnpoint source.  A source discharging pollutants into the environment that is not a single
   point (1).;
                      A well drilled in a selected location for the purpose of observing
  parameters such as water levels and pressure changes (2).  A nonpumping well  used  to
  observe the elevation of the water table or the potentiometric surface. An observation
  well is generally of larger diameter than a piezometer and typically is screened or slotted
  throughout the thickness of the aquifer (3).
  Parameter. See hydrogeologic parameter.

                            the intake portion of the well is less thanthe full thickness of
Permeabmty-  ^ity of a  porous  medium to transmi* fluids under a hydraulic gradient
(1).  The property or capacity of a porous rock, sediment, or sp|l for transmitting a fluid;
it is a measure of the relative ease of fluid flow under unequal pressure (2).
Permeability coefficient. Rate of flow of water through a unit cross-sectional area under
a unit hydraulic gradient at the prevailing temperature (field permeability coefficient), or
adjusted to 15 degrees C (1).
                                        C-14
  the aquifer (2).  A well constructed in such a way that it draws water directly from a
  fractional part of the total thickness of,:thsi aquifer.  The fractional part may be located
  at the top, the bottom, or anywhere else in the aquifer (3).
  Partfculate transport. Movement of undissolved particles in subsurface water (1).
  Peclet number.  Relationship between the advective and diffusive components of. solute         |
  transport; expressed  as the ratio of the product of the average interstitial velocity and
  the characteristic length, divided by the coefficient of molecular diffusion.  Small values
 indicate diffusion dominates; large values indicate advection dominates (1).
 Perched water.  Unconfined ground water separated from an underlying main body  of
 ground water by an unsaturated zone (2).
 Percolation.  Downward movement of water  through the unsaturated zone; also defined  as
 the downward flow of water in saturated or nearly saturated  porous media at hydraulic
 gradients of 1.0 or less (1).  The act of water seeping or filtering through the soil without
 a definite channel (2).
                                                                                               I


-------
 Permeability, effective.  Observed permeability of a porous medium to one fluid phase,
 under conditions of physical interaction between the phase and other fluid phases present

 "V..       ,   '         ;   .     :'-..       •     ..     .-     '    •                  j
 Permeability, intrinsic.  Relative ease with which porous medium can  transmit a fluid
 under a potential gradient, as a property of the medium itself.  Property of a medium
 expressing the relative ease with which fluids can pass through it (1).
 pH.  A  measure of the  acidity or alkalinity of a solution, numerically equal to 7 for
 neutral  solutions, increasing  with increasing alkalinity and decreasing with increasing
 acidity. Originally stood for "potential of hydrogen" (2).                                            f
 Phreatic water. See saturated zone,
 Piezometric surface. See potentibmetric surface.
 Point source.  Any discernible, confined, or discrete conveyance from which pollutants are
 or  may  be  discharged, including (but not limited  to)  pipes, ditches, channels, tunnels,
 conduits, wells, containers, rolling  stock, concentrated  animal  feeding operations,  or            f
 vessels (1).
 Pollutant.  Any solute or cause of change in physical properties that renders water unfit
 for a given use (3).
 Pollution.   When  the  contamination concentration levels restrict  the  potential use of
 ground water (2).                                                                               £
 Pore.  See interstice.
Pore space. Total space  in an aquifer medium not occupied by solid soil or rock particles
a).        ,     •'                •  •            .-•'.'•;••                .
Porosity (n).  Ratio  of the total volume of voids  available for fluid transmission to the
total volume of a porous  medium.  Also the ratio of the volume of the voids of a soil or ,           ^
rock mass  that can be drained by gravity to the total  volume of the mass  (1).  The
percentage of the bulk volume of a rock or soil that is occupied by interstices, whether
isolated or  connected (2).  The ratio of the volume of void spaces in a rock or sediment to
the total volume of  the  rock  or sediment (3).  Porosity may be primary, formed during
deposition  or  cementation of the  material, or secondary, formed after deposition  or
cementation, such as fractures.                                                                  f
Potable water. Suitable for human consumption as drinking water (1).
                                       C-15

-------
  Potential.  Any of several scalar variables, each involving energy as a function of position
  or condition} of relevance here is the fluid potential of ground water (1).
*               ' '"' "';               '    .'. "        '    ..... '  " ; ..... '] " '  '•  '   " j   '[' /"'V^'
  Potential drop. Difference in total head between two equipoteintial lines (1).
  Potentiometric surface.  A surface that represents the level to which water will rise in
  tightly cased wells.  If the head varies significantly with depth  in the aquifer, then there
  may  be  more than  one potentiometric surface.   The water table  is  a particular
 potentiometric surface for an unconf ined aquifer (3).
 Pressure head. Hydrostatic pressure expressed as the height (above a measurement point)
 of a column of water that the pressure can support (1).
 Pressure, static. Pressure exerted by a fluid at rest (1).
 Public water supply system.  System for provision to the public  of piped water for human
     :,  •         •   ."f       ;i  •  , .' .   • " M'   ' ,•'",••;':' .,,..'.  ' ••"••,>J>», |;'.> : •:; *WW{.v\\, ""•"  i.'rv-f. *,•:'. v",v P.. -••i>i;l;f\ ''.><*
 consumption, if such  system has at least  15  service connections or regularly  serves at
 least 25 individuals daily or at least 60 days out of the year.  The term includes  any
 collection, treatment, storage, and distribution facilities under control of the operator of
 such system and used primarily in connection  with the system, and any collection or
       ;     ,    •   • ,:, .  .  •     '     . : ••: ; vl , -,,,, ; , ,••••„ :,:; ....... fi ...... n '" i ' ' i            |
 pretreatment storage  facilities  not  under such  control that are  used  primarily  in
 connection with the system.
                    :':   '"'   ,'   • ,  .  "'    '.!..'' ' '   "-:-, -        '
Pumping test.  A test that is conducted to determine aquifer or well characteristics (1).
 A test made by pumping a well for a period of time and observing the change in hydraulic
 head in the aquifer.  A pump test  may be used to determine the capacity of the well and
the hydraulic characteristics of the aquifer. Also called aquifer test (3).
                  »  i  ,  n   "   . " '   ,  ,i   I  i   '  • ', "  i" . ,'":',' ...... ', ,: i ' ir ,i iifj'l1 •, ...... | ii | H1" '» ', j1, , "l,,!.,"!,'1, ..I .||i'i"| , i":,: .',•"',,
                                         1           "          ", ...... •" '* ......... l"
Radial flow.  The flow of water in an aquifer toward a vertically  oriented well (3).
     •          •         •   '•   ,   ,    i, ' . '  T           ............      f
                !   ,     '        '•••,,.  I                     Ml   III II
Radius of influence.  The radial distance from the center of a well bore to the point where
there is no lowering of the water table or potentiometric surface (the edge of its cone of
depression) (2).
Recharge (r).  The addition of water to the zone of saturation; also, the amount of water
added.  Can be expressed as a rate (Le., in/yr) or a volume (2).
Recharge area. Area in which water reaches the zone of saturation by surface infiltration
                  . .•••  •..• "  ••       •    • « -I  -  >    ............................. in .......... i ......                 i
(1).  An area in which there are downward components of hydraulic head in the aquifer.
      1 ,           '•'•'!'  • '   ' „ •    ,,    ' ' .  '  ' I  ''""i'1 ',,M*                            '
Infiltration moves downward into the deeper parts of an aquifer in a recharge area (3).
                                         C-16
I;]	If,1.- "IE;
                                                                                                 i

-------
 Recharge basin. A basin or pit excavated to provide a means of allowing water to soak
 into the ground at rates exceeding those that would occur naturally (2).
   «*''••    ,             .          .  .     ••,      •'•''•         .'''"''-
 Recharge boundary.  An aquifer system boundary that adds water to the aquifer. Streams
 and lakes are typical recharge boundaries (2).
 Runoff.  That part of precipitation flowing to surface streams (1). The total amount of
 water flowing  in  a stream.   It  includes overland  flow,  return  flow, interflow,  and
 baseflow (2).
 Saturated zone.  Portion of the  subsurface environment in which all voids are ideally filled
 with  water under pressure greater than atmospheric (1). The zone in which the voids in
 the rock or soil are filled with  water at a pressure greater than atmospheric. The water
 table is  the top of  the saturated zone in an unconfined aquifer (3).  Also called the
 phreatic zone.
 SOW A. Safe Drinking Water Act.
 Semiconfined.  An  aquifer that  has a "leaky" confining unit and displays characteristics of
 both confined and unconfined aquifers (see leaky aquifer) (1).
 Sole Source  Aquifer (SSA).   An aquifer that is the sole or principal source of drinking
 water, as established under Section 1424(e) of the SDWA.
 Solute transport.  Net flux of solute through  a hydrogeologic unit, controlled by the flow
 of subsurface water and transport mechanisms (1).
 Solute transport model.  Mathematical model used to predict the movement of solutes
 (generally contaminants) in an aquifer through time. ,
Solution  channel.   Tubular  or planar channel  formed by  solution  in  carbonate-rock
 terrains, usually along joints and bedding planes (4).
        •*•            '     '         '•         ".         >,''""
Sorption.   Processes that  remove solutes from the fluid phase and concentrate them on
 the solid phase of a medium; used to encompass absorption and adsorption (1).
Specific discharge.  The volume of water flowing through a unit cross-sectional area of an
 aquifer (1).
Specific yield.   The ratio of the volume of water that a given mass of saturated rock or
 soil will yield  by  gravity to  the  volume of  that mass.   This  ratio  is stated  as  a
 percentage (1).
                                        C-17

-------
   Sprfng*  ™*frete;P^» **«:« ground water flows naturally from rock or soil onto the land
   surface or anto a surface-water body (1).                 .
   i      n                       ,           ,         ,  ,   ,      .,*,,,,,,„„'! ,„• •, ,"
  SSA. See Sole Source Aquifer.         '  '                         -

  Stagnation point.  A place in a ground-wafer flow field at which the ground water is not
  moving. The magnitude of vectors of hydraulic head at the point are equal but opposite in
  direction (3).
        ;  •          '. •,:  '   _   ,   _     ,••.,'•'  " '  -:••. - ',;•, 4\ *K^^,fl'^l»i;- •,!' :• <}-.•>.,.-.. i.i't:
  Static head.  See head, static.
                     , !l!v   • •  •• "  ;           . • !'  .' 'i'1*'1 :''  i           I  l i   '      *    i
  State.  Includes, in addition to the several States, only the District of Columbia, Guam,
  the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Northern Mariana Islands, the  Virgin  Islands,
  American Samoa, and the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands.
  State Wellhead Protection Program.  Program to protect wellhead protection areas within
  a State's jurisdiction from contaminants that may have any adverse effects on the health
  of persons (SDWA, subsection l«8(a)).
  Static water level.  The level of water in a well that is not being affected by withdrawal
  of ground water (2).

 Storage coefficient.  Volume of water an aquifer releases from  or takes into storage per
 unit surface (or subsurface) area per unit change in head (1).
                   ,	;'i •   -      '  ' ,, , •• ''-, :'i|'' '•  ";.. -«",' - • \,-(;':ji '; <'••jtff;v;!i,•'.'•.;•'! '••'. /'..i,/'1: • .'';;,v. •;*; ';•:\.,;;
 Storage, specific.  The amount of water released from or ta!Sen into storage per unit
 volume of a porous medium per unit change in head (3).
 Storativity (s).   A  dimensionless  term  representing the  volume of water  an aquifer
 releases from or takes into storage per unit surface area of the aquifer per unit change in
 head.  It  is  equal  to  the product  of specific storage  and aquifer thickness.   In an
 unconf ined aquifer, the Storativity is equivalent to the specific yield. Also called storage
 coefficient (3).
        i  "           ' ,;'.   .  '    '•  ''• ,    ••" .'" .','• ' .'if.. ••  ' • ,' '•.'.          (  i   '                 "
 Time of travel (TOT). The time required for a contaminant to move in the saturated zqne
 from a specific point to a well.
                     >  '       •  "-'     ' ' '  {•' •':'•;: •'•  '.;.• '  ;"'''. ;.;.>;,r.-1Sif V''RJ ''••} '''^,^':- '^]t :
 TOT. See time of travel.

 Transmissivity (t).   Rate at  which water of the  prevailing;  kinematic viscosity  is
 transmitted through a unit width of the aquifer under a unit hydraulic gradient.  It is equal
 to an integration of  the hydraulic conductivities across the  saturated part of the aquifer
perpendicular to the flow paths (1). The rate at which water  is transmitted through a unit
                                           " i,      '„,.''                    i .    .
                                         C-18
Mr*1,1    '
     I
                                                        ', l! 'll'i'i "i'n i 'l.'u.lt*
                                                                                       <,,:., <« ;1	ii'l	y'Sfi ^ "M. l< ;, /J6 "liiillli; i!	' "*: Iklv

-------
width of an aquifer under a unit hydraulic gradient.  Transmissivity values are given in
gallons per  minute through a vertical section of an aquifer 1 foot wide and extending the
full'saturated height of an  aquifer  under a hydraulic gradient of one in the  English
Engineering system; in the Standard International System, transmissivity is given in cubic             [
meters per  day through a vertical section of an aquifer 1 meter wide and extending the
full saturated height of an aquifer under a hydraulic gradient of one (2).  It is a function of
properties of the liquid, the porous media, and the thickness of the porous media (3).
                  '   " '           •';,''"'-        "*           -                        '
Transport.  Conveyance of solutes and particles in flow systems (1).
        '••.'...•'.''     .    ;    •'',-•                    •                . ,••
Turbulent flow.   Water flow in which  the flow  lines are confused and heterogeneously             F
mixed.  It is typical of flow in surface water bodies (2).  That type of flow in which the
fluid  particles move  along very  irregular paths.  Momentum can be exchanged between
one portion  of the fluid and another. Compare with laminar flow (3).
UIC.  See Underground Injection Control.
            4       _                           '   .            - ".       /              ...-(•'
Unconfined.  Conditions in which the upper surface of the zone of saturation forms a   ,          •
water table under atmospheric pressure (1).                                                         t
Unconsolidated aquifer.  An aquifer made  up of loose material, such as sand or gravel,
that has not undergone lithification.
          •  I       •       ••_.''.        '     '
Underground Injection Control (UIC).   The regulations for injection wells.  The program
provides grants to States under Section 1^3(b) of SOW A.
Unsaturated flow. Movement of water in a porous medium in which the pore spaces are
not filled with water (1).
Unsaturated zone. The  zone between the land surface and the deepest or regional water
table. It includes the root zone, intermediate zone, and capillary fringe.  The pore spaces
contain water, as well as air and other gases at less than atmospheric pressure. Saturated
bodies, such as perched ground water,  may exist in the Unsaturated zone, and water             ft
pressure within these may be greater than atmospheric (1).  Same as vadose zone.
Vadose zone.  See Unsaturated zone.
Velocity,  average  interstitial (v).  Average  rate of ground-water flow in  interstices,
expressed as the product of hydraulic conductivity and hydraulic gradient divided by the
effective  porosity.  It is  synonymous  with average linear ground-water velocity or             P
effective velocity (1).
                                        C-19
                                            \   •      ' -
                                                                           '.           ,            I

-------
 Water budget.  An evaluation of all the sources of supply and 'the corresponding discharges
 with respect to an aquifer or a drainage basin (3).
1 Water table. Upper surface of a zone of saturation, where that surface is not formed by a
 confining unit; water pressure in the porous medium is equal to atmospheric pressure (1).
                                                                                  stk\ *u\\afKMwmm fc
The surface between  the vadose zone and the ground water; that surface of a body of
unconfined ground" water at which the'pressure "is equal to that of the'atnTOsphere (2).' The
   ,1 " i.   ' ' ' '". „  « mi1  ,: .i,,, '• "i ijiiiu i i', "", < 'T " " •'!!•,' . »• u " <" ' '"ll 'I	I-, "i' . i; >'; •' ii ii '• ' • >' i ,,'"t''•• #3 i :.,:'"' i'' iiWJ'iii11 "'"'ii! I'SlililS!!!! aiiiiwaiiiiiai1 iii«', il III III III II III I 11  "», iilil/i l'l:', "liii^SSSi'f!	iliiaSJt!!1!; !*,	I'iulU:''!"'!, .a!!1; iiiii'i!"];;*!'1  u\ hi^iJIJ1"
surface in an unconfined aquifer or confining bed at which the  pore water pressure is
atmospheric. It 'can be measured by installing shallow wells' extending a few feet into the'
   .( i ,       i > . •  .""ti  ,!  i ' ' .'   it	  .•' " ;i. «i('.,	vV'l*''.":' >;• "i!.* ii":'Jt)i''Si!'iHif*iwiJS*f JSSSwflKi?!	hMSLiiiM!i;'!LTw«'ir«'i.i(iKi».!	"ssni"i-'if :s"fA:a	isi
zone of saturation and then measuring the water level in those wells (3).
 Well field.  An area containing two or more wells supplying a public water supply system.
 Wellfjeld. Synonymous with well field.
    t , '          	' , iT'iill  <  „ ,  '  • ,i  ,,i ir . , " :,   I                     III   ill I   I    ||     I
 Well, fully penetrating. A well drilled to the bottom of an aquifer, constructed in such a
 way that it withdraws water from the entire thickness of the aquifer (3).
    :	£ •   -v .•••'si  t."  ''^^..v;-v^:::^i	i(,!;.^::?3»ffiK^	i	in	iff"'	m'tfffift	m
 Wellhead. The physical structure, facility, or device at the land surface from or through        I
 which ground water" flows or is pumped from subsurface,1 water-bearing formation's.	
Wellhead Protection Area (WHPA).  The surface and subsurface area surrounding a water
well or  well field, supplying a public water system,  through which contaminants  are
reasonably likely to move toward and reach such water well or well field.
Well interference. See interference.  i  .   . ^     _. ^..^	^  . ^	 .....,.;..,	 : _;,,,	(i	_ .
    '	,••:• ' .   • .    • i  :-;;?"  ,   •'  -;" ':;,,'  ':«;'.;,: ..'.n.^ri!"'- ;r ;r;";; ;v'v.>	'k	v,fiiii;';»:i!':;ls^                                   	
Well screen. A filtering device used to keep sediment from entering a water well (2).
Well yield. The volume of water discharged from a well in gallons per minute or cubic
meters per day (2).
WHPA. See Wellhead Protection Area.
ZQC.  See zone of contribution.
2X31.  See zone of influence.
Zone  of  Contribution (ZOC).  The area surrounding  a  pumping well that encompasses all
areas or features that supply ground-water recharge to the well.
Zone  of  Influence  (ZOD.  The area surrounding a pumping well within which  the water
table or potentiometric surfaces have been changed due to ground-water withdrawal.
                                         C-20

-------
Zone of Transport (ZOT).  The area surrounding a pumping well, bounded by an isochrone
and/or isoconcentration contour, through which a contaminant may travel and reach the
wtll.                                   .-.            ' 'f
ZOT.  See zone of transport.
                                                                                            F
                                                                                             u
                                                                                             I
                                       C-21
                                        •   '        •',       ..    .        ,-       '    :•   .''   a

-------
                 m
                   !,i u i1'' ,  i,  i!
.)') .i1 .".-{ii i,' 'it I; litESBlii'i,;; Ci*1 :'i •. ts^; 
-------
      .--'''     •      •      '   .    '  ••: \            -        '    ':     .      .
                                  APPENDIX D
          '&,*";•"          "        . -               •
     MODEL'ASSESSMENT FOR DELINEATING WELL HEAD PROTECTION AREAS
   **             '                      .                   •
                            Excerpt From'Draft Report            -

     Included in this appendix are an edited version of the Executive Summary and a list
of models from this draft report, prepared by Paul K.M. van der Heijde and Milovan S.
Beljin of the International Ground Water Modeling  Center at the Holcomb Research
Institute, at Butler Unviersity, Indianapolis, Indiana.  This report was  prepared  at the
request  of  the  Office of  Ground-Water Protection through a Cooperative Agreement
between Holcomb Research Institute and the Office of Research and  Development at
EPA.  Management of this effort was provided by the Robert S. Kerr Environmental
Research Laboratory, Ada, Oklahoma. The final report will be available soon.
                                                                                           f
                                      b-i
                                                                                           i

-------
                                                               I'll I III
                                                                                        HIII |i II i i ill ii*
                                 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
    "  :V\; '       ,'": '  '    '   ,   ."'  .'                                .              ]
       One'element 6f the 1986 Amendments to the Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) of
 1974 is  the protection of wellhead areas from contaminants that 'may have an adverse         (
 effect on public health. In establishing wellhead protection areas (WHPA's), many factors
 need to be considered, including:
 •  •   ;:|i:  :    ,i  " > •) ill'.!.,''.';':":; r '•'':  i,'  :" ,i	:. • •  i.! ft. <;:v .•!'";";;.i' •'	?;••;i;i^Sfejfti^lte^^Hfr!,'ii ;ii";i ffii'i&:.MM'^m	^.iii&iii
      •    Zone of Influence around a well or well field
            . :   '., -:  I 'If ill! !'..  .   ,   , "i s , ••<  . '.'./HV'i:, '"(;<	,iii '"•SW'L'fl	JWSi'ilkilH'J'iBPlPWifr,1	S'.E'iiJi-'.Mi'raj.'.H.iJ	'Jl'^Wtf
      •    Presence of  interfering neighboring wells or well fields
      •    Water table  drawdown by the wells or well fields under consideration                   f
 if     '• '        ,  	 , ii'VII'i,: '";  • • ;• „   ""  , ji'i,, '. , .",••,,••; ',,4 I              II I I I II  IIIIII I I Illlll II   I   l[l               '       I
      •    Various sources of contamination in the  well recharge area (not necessarily the
            same as its zone of  influence)
      •    Flow paths,  transport velocities, and travel times for various contaminants
            under various hydroiogic conditions.
        :    ' .,•   (  ' .i'J   i '• .•  '-'  '••••;'. 'i ;.  	•'" -i'-ii-i •,•;••.•;, •„"'	•; 	:.'.•}«(:.:	;>iv,viir*i«H	'	:,!';u,,f wi&H.iXtftMuAtiliti/'a*"	's<«^^
       - ;  •	i   ,    •   'i;;i;i!iji •,    •     • "', •„ i   \; •„, •. -r;,	' •,'.  ,';':»;,/"r"	:VnV,MvV 1&'!'l.''BlLfriWtlr,lit>'f,i.f i'	:|li'iS'iiitin;.w:ii"'B'"':r4iw,•*!.(. f	its;, (ft	Risw^rBewasi
      To determine a site-specific WHPA, a systematic, analytic approach is necessary;         I
 mathematical simulation models provide a viable  and often the only method to determine
 the WHPA when quantitative  criteria are used.  Such models are useful instruments in
 understanding the mechanisms  of  ground-water systems  and the processes that influence
 their quality.  Through  their predictive capabilities, models provide a means to analyze
 the response of the site-specific system to various management alternatives and potential
 public health threats.          	      	              §
      This  report  is  aimed at  providing information on existing ground-water flow and
 contaminant transport and fate  models that  might be considered for use in a WHPA
 delineation study.  Although physical ground-water models can be useful for studying
 certain problems, the present focus is on  mathematical flow and contaminant transport
 models in which the causal relationships among various components of the system and its
 environment are expressed in terms of mathematics  and translated into  a computer code.           *
      Flow models are used to  calculate changes in the distribution of hydraulic head of
 fluid  pressure,  drawdowns,  rate and direction of  flow, travel times, and  the position of
 interfaces between immiscible  fluids.  Two types of models can be used  to evaluate the
    ,            '   •	 ' •  "   •   "" ' "'	  '"' " "' •	;•''""'' ''	 'i	'	'	i	J|	/' .'""	|	"	'	 I	
 chemical quality of ground water:  hydrochemical models describing equilibrium reactions
 or reaction kinetics, and models that simulate solute transport and fate.  Solute transport
 and fate models are",' used .for  •'the" prediction' of"' m'ovemerit^	cohcentration&^an'd "mass
      ,' " | •' ,,        '  ['"a, i'ijl •  ; ' ',,:, ,  ""!»',,;"••'"; ': "	'!• i. 1,(J11V";;",'"'!h	,,	'I,„:| • •,:"" *'"''"ij1'' • 1.1''«»'<' •''.'"J11: :|•;!' »|.i!'i"	|.|j!!!":.;E V '• SKf,ffXf§v!i!|1'''i'''"',!"''"''i1 '•''''.V'!","'j;i!l':"ll!!JKi!":/i1!11:1 n:1'!''11'!'1'!, '''';i1''?,;„',/S, l':; "!ll!.;lf,,:,'!'
balance components of water-soluble constituents.                   ,
                                           D-2

-------
      The  major  criteria in  selecting a  model for a  particular site-specific WHPA
delineation are the model's suitability for the  intended  use,  reliability,  and efficient  • .
application.   A  model's efficiency  is  determined by the availability of its code and              i
documentation, and its usability, portability, and modiflability.  A perfect match rarely
exists between desired characteristics and those of available models.  Reassessment of
the selection criteria and their relative weight is often necessary.      -
      A major issue in model use is credibility, which is based on its proven reliability and
the extent of its use. It is often assumed that most program errors originally present in a
widely used program have been detected and corrected. Successful prior applications of a              [
program in situations comparable to  that  for which  it has been  selected  increase
confidence in its applicability to the new situation.
      A model's credibility can be  evaluated  in terms of the level of  review  and testing
applied to it and by evaluating the success rate  of its use.  Testing a code involves two
phases:                                                                                            .
      •    Verification to check accuracy and assure that the code is fully operational,
      •    Field  validation to determine  how  well  the model's theoretical  foundation
           describes the actual system behavior that the model has been designed to
           simulate.
      Many of  the available models have not been subjected to an extensive review and              -
test procedure.  Reviews  have often been  limited to peer review of  theory and project
reporting.  Though most models have undergone some verification, the results of this are
rarely reported, especially for the more complex models. Only a few models are reported
to have undergone extensive field validation.
      With respect to availability  of ground-water software, a distinction can be  made
between public domain and proprietary software.   Models that are available without              Ji
restrictions in their use  and distribution  are  considered, to be in the public domain.
Available proprietary software can be obtained or accessed under  certain restrictions for
use, duplication, and distribution.                                                    '
SELECTED MODELS
      Sixty-four  models were  selected a computerized  search of the model  annotation              |
data  bases of  the International Ground Water Modeling Center  (IGWMC).   These  data
bases have been  developed and maintained over the years with major support of EPA's
                                         D-3

-------
 R.S. Kerr  Environmental  Research  Laboratory in  Ada.  Oklahoma.   This search  was
     ,i? ='" %. * *                                                    .     .
 folio wed "by an evaluation of the maintenance and update history of each model's code.
Models were  chosen  because   of  their  availability,  level of.  documentation,  and
 applicability to the wellhead protection zone delineation problem.  Of the 64 models, 27
     ;;/ ',"       ,  • '  ,;;;w  • »' -, ,;  •-,•;•	   . 	••	~	,	^J	:	
 are flow and  37 are solute transport models.  Fifty-one of the models are numerical and
 13  are analytical and semi-analytical.   The  attachment  below  contains summary
  "'   "'  I.  '   .     	 	I"11*!  '"  ""	 „''• '  '	I 'I "i» «i '..i "I1 'I!	'IP, : ill',"!!'1, ','":"",P                P                     II I III »
 descriptions and detailed information on each model, and a comparison of  usability and
 reliability characteristics.
      A major limitation of tills study is the lack of available data on model usability,
 reliability,  and portability.   Many models  have  not been  subjected to  the extensive
 evaluation  required to rate them  according to the criteria presented  in  this report.
 Additional activities to fill in the information gaps in this report are desirable.
     ' Though  adequate  models are available for analysis of  most flow-related problems,
 this is  not the case for modeling contaminant transport.  Accurate  modeling  of  ground-
 water pollution is limited by some fundamental problems.  Available numerical techniques
are not always adequate for the  most complex transport mechanisms.   In addition,
     •;   . .     , ,,, • i  jit!!   '   ;   •; -  , -, 'is.                                                  ]
inadequate quantity or low quality of data often restricts model utility.

                                                              ','', i , |lll i, "Illl :• :",iiL'I!'!,
',':' , ", i> ,„ i :,'",' 'i|, PI! „'!!:' "liif ',1 'I1','""''",, ,1  '' i11'1 |i'ii,,!i''i	ifl 'in I", ", h' ,, ""'"' ,, ' • !,' 'i'	
,i;«'»' ;'3"f (M ii!,;: „.,\, illntl' I;;"'*,,!«i! t„• '• v• \-.? ",';)i •< '^ h111 '• \^wl ij'I, .i,"' :• Jl•• !. i,/,,i, w• i'
',,  ,,'i',;,,, ...I'iiwir'f '.,;,!'i^B, i" .nil",	IM	,	,. • | .•..•,? .:.!?,»J.M>L.	,' !,,i,, A '*'	, /"li'l1
, ,  ";;,i;,, "i:i.;i'1i:'1' .n,,.!1!!!,1!}! "t ^i'1 ]"' ' "l", i1!!;,1 •	 •, 'XI'1 r1™1,!1"^ "V v-,' " "'i1	i;1',,.,"!
                                                                                         I';,:;;?	            •
                                                                                         " ', 	;;",, '," ill Jin, Illi'll, 'fill ii'i-iiinil'llllllilil	llrlll!1!1!,!1!!!!!!!1'''!!,,
                                                                                          ,, "'uHi;:!'!'! viihiiiiiiiiiN"!'^:;*!!!!!:!1,''1' I'liiiiFtiiiiiiiiiii;
                                                                                         i;'(i;',fe'ijii:,ii]JlftaKf
                                                                                         1 L , ,',",' "„'!' V',": ;iis' ''i'1 hji ipiiiinil i,' T • • f ii niil i iiiPii"''", ii, ingniii iiiifiimaii
                                                                                         '•iilH'!1" „„•' ii'l'!'!'1''!1!11' il!"1!?!'1,, L'tiWiW"1!!1:"1 'I'llS'Ii11:,!1 ii Uri!1!1"1!"11!"!!!!!!
                                                                                                 JiiJ'v  	IV,S ".ll'liKJniilliilll!,
                                                                                                      I'iiniiiBlj'iii
                                                                                                      i

-------
                                  ATTACHMENT
            %;     DESCRIPTION OF MODEL CHARACTERISTICS
    *  ;                   '   •          ' •  .  '.     v     "    .          •  ' -     '     ' •   • .
The  "Model Output" column in  the tabulation presented below contains the type of
information available from the model output that could be required in WHPA delineation.
The following abbreviations are used:
     AI    Area  of Influence (the area surrounding a pumping or recharging well within
           which the potentiometric surface has been changed).
            /         ,                •'    t   '',•','                 -          .
     C     Concentration (concentration map of contaminant throughout the  simulated
           domain).

     CD    Cone  of Depression (the shape of the area of influence, in cross section).
     F    Fluxes.

     P    Pathways (path of a contaminant particle in the system).

     RA   Recharge Area  (the permeable layer through which precipitation and surface             I
          water may percolate to the aquifer and eventually reach the well).
     T    Travel times (isochrones).
     V    Velocities (ground-water velocities).
                                                                                              I
                                      D-5
                                       ''.'"'•   '         •   .-'-    •             '     '  •     a

-------
                                   ndiii^       '	ijr'ii™;^
                                    t• ">•	
HO.

f.





2.







3.







4.










5.




6.





7.







e.





!!. 1 IJ, , *
Auttor(s)
V
S.P. Newman
P.A. NltiMr-
•aoon



S.P. NeuMn







T.N. Narasimhan







T.A. PrlcKett
C.&. Lonnqulst









S.F. Pindar
E.O. Frind



C.F. Finder
C.I.. Voas




P.S. Huyakorn







P.S. Hgy«Horn





, iiii*!* : »i i,, i '»,' :„'•„', "1,1. i • •"
Contact Address

0*pt. of Hydrology and
Nat«r Resources
University of Arizona
Tucson. AZ 85721


Oept. of Hydrology and
Hater Resources
University of Arizona
Tucson, AZ 85721




Sattelle Pacific NW Lab
-Hater and Land Resources
Division
P.O. Box 999
Rich land. HA 99352



Consulting Hater
Resources Engineers
6 6.H. Baker Drive
Urbana, IL 61801







Dept. of Civil
Engineering
Princeton University
Princeton, NJ 08540

U.S. Geological Survey
Hater Resources Division
National Center .M.S. 431
Reston. VA 22092


Geotrans, Inc.
209 Elden St., #301
Herndon, VA 22070





Geotrans, Inc.
209 Elden St., J301
Herndon. VA 22070



Model Nue
(last update)

' FREESURF 1
(1979)

,.


UNSAT2
(1979)




,«

TRUST
(1981)






PLASH
(1986)









ISOOUAD
(1982)



AOUIFEM
(1979)




GREASE 2
(1982)






SATURN 2
(1982)




Model
Description

Simulation of tKO-dlaen-
sional verticil! or axi-
syeoetric, stuady-state
flow in an anlsotropic.
•heterogeneous,, confined
or •ater-tabUi aquifer.
A two-diMnsi
-------
NO.

9.







10.








11.






12.






13.





14.








15.





Author(s)
JU
«*
P. Huyakorn







P. Huyakorn








J.E. Reed
M.S. Bedinger
J.E. Terry




T.R. Knowles






INTERA
Environmental
Consultants,
Inc. and
INTERCOM?
Resource
Development ft
Eng., Inc.
C.R. Faust
T. Chan
B.S. Ramada
8.M. Thompson





L.F. Konikow
J.D. Bredehoeft




Contact Address

Geotrans, Inc.
209 Elden St., 4301
Herndon, VA 22070






IGHMC
Hoi comb Research
•Institute
Butler University
4600 Sunset Avenue
Indianapolis, IN 46208




U.S. Geological Survey
Room 2301
Federal Building
700 H. Capitol Ave.
Little Rock, AR 72201


Texas Water
Deve I opment Board
P.O. Box 13231
Austin, TX 78711



U.S. Geological Survey
Box 25046 Mail Stop 411
Denver Federal Center
Lakewood. CO 80225



Performance Assessment
Dept.
Office of Nuclear Waste
Isolation
Battelle Project Mngnt.
Oiv.
505 King Avenue
Columbus, OH 43201
-
U.S. Geological Survey
431 National Center
Reston, VA 22092



Model Name
(last update)
t"'
SEFTRAN
(1983)
.






TRAFRAP
(1986) ,
f







SUPERMOCK
(1975)





GWSIM-II
(1981)





SNIP/
SWIPR/
SHENT
(1985)



STFLO
(1982)






-
MOC
(1987)




Model
Description

To provide simple and
cost-effective analyses
of two-dimensional fluid
flow and contaminant or
heat transport problems
in areal , cross-section-
al or ax i symmetric eon-
figuration of saturated.
heterogeneous aquifers.
A finite element model
to study transient, two
dimensional, saturated
ground water flow and
chemical or radionucl ide
transport in fractured
and unfractured, an i so-
tropic, heterogeneous.
multi-layered porous
media.
To simulate transient
stress and response in a
saturated-unsaturated
ground water fio» system
including a water-table
aquifer overlying a con-
fined aquifer.
A transient, two-dimen-
sional , horizontal model
for prediction of water
levels and water quality
in an anisotropic heter-
ogeneous confined and
uncon fined aquifer.
To simulate unsteady,
three-dimensional
groundwater flow, heat
, and contaminant trans-
port in an anisotropic.
heterogeneous aquifer.

A linear finite element
code for simulation of
steady-state, two-dimen-
sional (areal or verti-
cal) plane or axisymmet-
ric ground-water flow In
anisotropic, hetero-
geneous, confined, leaky
or water-table aquifers.
To simulate transient.
two-dimensional, hori-
zontal groundwater flow
and solute transport in
confined, semi con fined
or water table aquifers.
Model
Output

' Al ,CD,RA.F,C.



'



Al ,CD,RA,F,C.








AI.CD.RA






AI.CO.F.C.RA






AI.CD.RA.F.C,
V





AI,CO,RA,F








AI,CD,RA,F,C.
V




ifcwMC
Key

0588







0589








0611






,0680






0692





0694








0740





                                                           I
D-7

-------
                                                                                                                  iiin n  inn nn|i n
  Ho. j Authpr(s)
   16.
  S.P. Caraoedlan
  L.F. Konlkow
  17.
  18.
  19.
  W.E. Sanford
  UF. Koniko*
 20.
 P.O.  Trescott
 5.P.  Larson
       P.O. Trescott
       G.F. Pind*r
       S.P. Larson
 Miller, I.
 J. Marlon-
 Lambert
21.
22.
23.
C.  Segol
E.O.  Frind
K,R. Rushton
L.H. Tomlinson
H.H. Haitjema
O.D.L. Stride
                    Contact  Address
                          U.S. Geological Survey
                          431 National Center
                          Reston, VA  22092
                             Model Hue
                             (last update)
                              FRONTRACK
                                11983)
                          U.S. Geological Survey
                          431 National Center
                          Reston, VA  22092
                              MOCDENSE
                               (1986)
                          U.S. Geological Survey
                          Branch of Groundwater
                          M.S. 411 National Center
                          Reston, VA  22092
                   U.S. Geological Survey
                   Branch of Ground Mater
                   M.S. 411 National Center
                   Reston, VA  22092
                         Colder Associates
                         2950 Northup Hay
                         Bellevue, HA  98004
                         Oept. of Earth Sciences
                         University of  Waterloo
                         HaterIoo. Ontario
                         Canada  N2L 361
Dept. of Civil
Engineering
Univ. of Birmingham
P.O. Box 363
Birmingham, B15 2TT
United Kingdom

School of Public I
  Environmental Affairs
10th Street
Indiana University
Bloomington, IN  47405
                              USGS-3D-
                                FLOW
                               (1982)
                              USGS-2D-
                                FLOW
                               (1976)
                               GGHP
                               (1983)
                               3-0
                            SATURATEO-
                            UKSATURATED
                            TRANSPORT
                              MODEL
                              (1976)
                                                       AQU-1
                                                       (1979)
                                                      SYLENS
                                                      (1989)
  Model
  Description
  A finite  difference
  model  for simulation of
  convective transport of
  a conservative tracer
  dissolved in groundwater
  under  steady or tran-
  sient  flow conditions.
  The model calculate*
  heads, velocities and
  tracer particiit
  positions.

  A model to simulate
  transport and dispersion
  of either one or two
  constituents in ground-
  water where thore i s
  two-dimensional, density
  dependent flow,  it  uses
  f i n i te-d i f ference and
 method of  characteris-
 tics to solve the flow
 and transport equations.

 To simulate  transient,
 three-dimensional  and
 quasi  three-dimnsienal,
 saturated  flow  in  an!so-
 tropic, heterogeneous
 ground  water  systems.

 To simulate transient,
•two-dimensional hori-
 zontal  or  vertical flow
 in  an anisotropic  and
 hetrogeneous, confined,
 leaky-confined or  water-
 table aquifer.

 Steady-state or tran-
 sient simulation of two-
 dimensional, vertical or
 axisymmetric and quasi -
 three dimensional flow
 and transport of reac-
 tive solutes in aniso-
 tropic. heterogeneous,
multi-layered aquifer
 systems.

Determination of concen-
tration of consorvative
or nonconservatiive sol-
ute in transient, three-
dimensional saturated-
unsaturated floii sys-
tems.

Basic transient model
for single layered two-
dimensional horizontal
ground water  flow.
Model ing of steady-state
groundwater flow in re-
gional  double aquifer
systems with local  in-
terconnections.
  Model
  Output
TSffiC
Key
                            AI.CD,RA.F.C.
                            V,P,T
                            AI.CO.RA.F.C.
                            AI,CD,RA,F
                           AI.CD.RA.F
                           AI.CO.RA.F.C.
                           V.P.T
                           AI.CO.F.C
                           AI.CD.F
AI.CO.RA.F
                  0741
                 I
                 0742
                 0770
                 0771
                 1010
                 1070
                 1230
1791
                                                                                                                            I
                                                       D-S
                         'I :"'f!
                                                                                                                            II

-------
No.
" 24.



25.






26.


27.

26.


29.





30.





3'.




Author^.
C. Van Den
Akker



P. Van der Veer






S.K. Gupta
C.T. Kincaid
P.R. Meyer
C.A. Newbill
CD Onl •>
• •»• vOlv •

S.K. Gupta
C.R. Cole
F.H. Bond

A.E. Reisenauer
C.R. Cole


R.H. Nelson





R.D. Schmidt





L.R. Townley '
J.L. Hi (son
A.S. Costa




Contact Address
National Institute for
Hater Supply
P.O. Box 150
2260 Ad Leidschendam
The Netherlands



Rijkswaterstaat
Data Processing Division
P.O. Box 5809
2280 HV Ri jswijk (2.H.)
The Netherlands





Batteile Pacific NH Labs
P.O. Box 999
Richland, HA 99332


Batteile Pacific NH Labs
Hater and Land Resources
Division
P.O. Box 999
Richland, HA 99352
Hater and Land Resources
Division
Batteile Pacific NH Labs
P.O. Box 999
Richland, HA 993S2


Batteile Pacific NH Labs
Sigma 5 Building
P.O. Box 999
Richland. HA 99352





U;S. Dept. of the
Interior
Bureau of Mines
P.O. Box 1660
Twin Cities. MN 55111




Ralph M. Parsons
Laboratory for Hater
Resources and
Hydrodynamics
Room 48-211
Massachusetts Inst. of
Technology
Cambridge. MA 02139
Model Naaw
(last update
FLOP-2
(1975)



MOTGRO
(1981)
<<





CFEST
(1985)


FE3D8H
(1983)

VTT
(1979)


PATHS
(1983)





ISLtSO
(1979)





AOUIFEM-1
(1979)




"Model 	 ;•;
Description
To generate path lines
for steady-state, flow
In a semi-confined, 1 so-
tropic, homogeneous
aquifer without storage
and to calculate resi-
dence times for a number
of water particles.
Prediction of ground-
water head and stream
function for two-dimen-
sional, vertical, steady
and unsteady, single or
multiple fluid flow in
inhoMogeneous, an i so-
tropic, confined or un-
confined aquifers of
arbitrary shapes.
A three-dimensional fi-
nite element Model to
simulate coupled transi-
ent flow, solute- and
heat-transport in satur-
ated porous media.
Transient or steady
state, three-dimensional
Simulation of flow in a '.
large Multi-layered
groundwater basin.
A transient model to
ca 1 cu 1 ate hy drau 1 i c head
in con fined-uncon fined
Multi -layered aquifer
systems, and to generate
streamlines and travei-
times.
To evaluate contamina-
tion problems in tran-
sient, two-dimensional ,
horizontal, groundwater
flow systems using an
analytical solution for
the flow equation and a
numerical solution for
the path line equations.
A three-dimensional
Model to describe tran-
sient flow behaviour of
leachants and ground-
cater in an anisotropic,
homogeneous aquifer in-
volving an arbitrary
pattern of injection and
recovery Mils.
A two-dimensional, fi-
nite-element Model for
transient, horizontal
groundwater flow.



Model
Output
C.V.PJ



AI.CD.F,V,P,T






AI,CD,F,RA.C.


AI,CD.RA,F,V

AI,CD,V,P,T


F.V.C.P.T


,


V.P.T





AI.CD.RA.F




IGHM5
Key
1821



1830






2070


2072

2092


2120





2560





2630




D-9

-------
No.
60}
61.
 62.
 63.
 64.
Author(s)
0. Koch   t •
 IHTERA
 Environmental
 Consultants
W.C.  Wilton
Contact Address
 fc.S. Betjin
 T. Steenhuis
 5. Paeenka
 Koch t Associates
 1660 S. Fillmore St.
 Denver. CO  80210
 BatT* 11* Project
 Management Division
 Performance
• Assessment   Dept.
 Office of Nuclear Hut*
   Isolation
 505 King Avenue
 Columaus, OH  43201
 IGWMC
 Holcosb Rasaareh
 institute
 Butler University
 4600 Sunset Avenue
 Indianapolis. IN  46208
  IGWMC
  HoIcomb Research
  Institute
  Butler University
  4600 Sunset Avenue
  Indianapolis,  IN  46208
  Northeast Regional
  Agricultural
  Engineering Service
  Riley-Robb Hall
  Cornell  University
  Ithaca,  NY   14853
                                                   Model  Hue
                                                   (last update)
AQUIFER4
  (1984)
VERTPAK-1
  (1982)
            "Model
             Description
   35
  MICRO-
 COMPUTER
 PROGRAMS
  (1984)
  SOLUTE
  (1985)
   MOUSE
   (1987)
                                                                                      Model
                                                                                      Output
A radial  finite differ-
ence Model  to simulate.
transient three-dimen-
sional groundwalrer flow
in a leaky-confined aqu-
ifer.

A package of analytical
solutions assent)led to
assist in verification
of numerical coites used
to simulate fluid fio«.
rock deformation, and
solute transport in
fractured and uinfractur-
ed porous Mdia.

A series of analytical
and sinple numerical
programs to analyze flo*
and transport of solutes
and heat  in confined,
 leaky or water  table
aquifers with simple
geometry.

A package of 6analyti-
cal models  for  solute
transport simulation  in
ground«ater.  The  pack-
 age also includes  pro-
 grams for unit  conver-
 sion' and error  function
 calculation.

 A set of four  I inked
 models for  tracking the
 movement and filte of  a
 soluble chemicnl  in sat-
 urated and unsnturated
 zones.
                                                                                            Al.CD.F
                                                                                            C.V.T
                                         Key
                                                                                                      6305
                                                                                                            6340
                                                                                             AI,CD,C,V,T
                                                                                             C.T
                                                                                                       6350
                                                                                                       6380
                                                                                             C.T
                                                                                                             6390
                                                         D-14
                                     *O.S. GoYornaint Printing Offic* : 1918 -516-002/B0049

-------